Using the last version (1.9) of kbool, downloaded from the wxArt2D project site.
This commit is contained in:
parent
5d5698d6bb
commit
521f428c35
|
@ -8,3 +8,7 @@ include makefile.include
|
|||
libbitmaps.a: $(OBJECTS)
|
||||
ar ruv $@ $(OBJECTS)
|
||||
ranlib $@
|
||||
|
||||
clean:
|
||||
rm -f *.o
|
||||
rm -f *.a
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -6,6 +6,17 @@ Please add newer entries at the top, list the date and your name with
|
|||
email address.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2008-Nov-14 UPDATE Jean-Pierre Charras <jean-pierre.charras@inpg.fr>
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
kbool:
|
||||
Using the last version (1.9) of kbool, downloaded from the wxArt2D project site
|
||||
(see www.wxart2d.org)
|
||||
But the version 1.8 bug still is here.
|
||||
So using the workaround remains mandatory.
|
||||
(this is not a problem because thermal shapes are better...)
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
2008-Nov-14 UPDATE Dick Hollenbeck <dick@softplc.com>
|
||||
================================================================================
|
||||
+gerview
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ COMMON_GLOBL wxString g_BuildVersion
|
|||
# include "config.h"
|
||||
(wxT(KICAD_SVN_VERSION))
|
||||
# else
|
||||
(wxT("(20081106-unstable)")) /* main program version */
|
||||
(wxT("(20081114-unstable)")) /* main program version */
|
||||
# endif
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
;
|
||||
|
@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ COMMON_GLOBL wxString g_BuildAboutVersion
|
|||
# include "config.h"
|
||||
(wxT(KICAD_ABOUT_VERSION))
|
||||
# else
|
||||
(wxT("(20081106-unstable)")) /* svn date & rev (normally overridden) */
|
||||
(wxT("(20081114-unstable)")) /* svn date & rev (normally overridden) */
|
||||
# endif
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
;
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -189,8 +189,10 @@ void dialog_copper_zone::OnInitDialog( wxInitDialogEvent& event )
|
|||
|
||||
m_NetNameFilter->SetValue( NetNameFilter );
|
||||
wxArrayString ListNetName;
|
||||
m_Parent->m_Pcb->ReturnSortedNetnamesList( ListNetName,
|
||||
m_NetSorting == 0 ? BOARD::ALPHA_SORT : BOARD::PAD_CNT_SORT );
|
||||
m_Parent->m_Pcb->ReturnSortedNetnamesList(
|
||||
ListNetName,
|
||||
m_NetSorting ==
|
||||
0 ? BOARD::ALPHA_SORT : BOARD::PAD_CNT_SORT );
|
||||
|
||||
if( m_NetSorting != 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
@ -336,8 +338,10 @@ bool dialog_copper_zone::AcceptOptions( bool aPromptForErrors, bool aUseExportab
|
|||
|
||||
m_Parent->m_Parent->m_EDA_Config->Write( ZONE_THERMAL_RELIEF_GAP_STRING_KEY,
|
||||
(long) m_Zone_Setting->m_ThermalReliefGapValue );
|
||||
m_Parent->m_Parent->m_EDA_Config->Write( ZONE_THERMAL_RELIEF_COPPER_WIDTH_STRING_KEY,
|
||||
(long) m_Zone_Setting->m_ThermalReliefCopperBridgeValue );
|
||||
m_Parent->m_Parent->m_EDA_Config->Write(
|
||||
ZONE_THERMAL_RELIEF_COPPER_WIDTH_STRING_KEY,
|
||||
(long) m_Zone_Setting->
|
||||
m_ThermalReliefCopperBridgeValue );
|
||||
|
||||
// If we use only exportable to others zones parameters, exit here:
|
||||
if( aUseExportableSetupOnly )
|
||||
|
@ -388,8 +392,10 @@ void dialog_copper_zone::OnNetSortingOptionSelected( wxCommandEvent& event )
|
|||
wxArrayString ListNetName;
|
||||
|
||||
m_NetSorting = m_NetSortingOption->GetSelection();
|
||||
m_Parent->m_Pcb->ReturnSortedNetnamesList( ListNetName,
|
||||
m_NetSorting == 0 ? BOARD::ALPHA_SORT : BOARD::PAD_CNT_SORT );
|
||||
m_Parent->m_Pcb->ReturnSortedNetnamesList(
|
||||
ListNetName,
|
||||
m_NetSorting ==
|
||||
0 ? BOARD::ALPHA_SORT : BOARD::PAD_CNT_SORT );
|
||||
if( m_NetSorting != 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
wxString Filter = m_NetNameFilter->GetValue();
|
||||
|
@ -448,12 +454,14 @@ void dialog_copper_zone::ExportSetupToOtherCopperZones( wxCommandEvent& event )
|
|||
if( !AcceptOptions( true, true ) )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
// Export to others zones:
|
||||
// Export settings ( but layer ) to others zones:
|
||||
BOARD* pcb = m_Parent->m_Pcb;
|
||||
for( int ii = 0; ii < pcb->GetAreaCount(); ii++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
ZONE_CONTAINER* zone = pcb->GetArea( ii );
|
||||
int zone_layer = zone->GetLayer();
|
||||
m_Zone_Setting->ExportSetting( *zone );
|
||||
zone->SetLayer( zone_layer );
|
||||
m_Parent->GetScreen()->SetModify();
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
|
|||
#include "protos.h"
|
||||
#include "id.h"
|
||||
#include "drc_stuff.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/include/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/include/kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
/*******************************/
|
||||
/* class WinEDA_PcbFrame */
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -464,7 +464,7 @@ void AddThermalReliefPadPolygon( Bool_Engine* aBooleng,
|
|||
// Now, add the 4 holes ( each is the pattern, rotated by 0, 90, 180 and 270 deg
|
||||
// WARNING: problems with kbool if angle = 0 (in fact when angle < 200):
|
||||
// bad filled polygon on some cases, when pads are on a same vertical line
|
||||
// this seems a bug in kbool polygon
|
||||
// this seems a bug in kbool polygon (exists in 1.9 kbool version)
|
||||
// angle = 450 (45.0 degrees orientation) seems work fine.
|
||||
// angle = 0 with thermal shapes without angle < 90 deg seems works fine also
|
||||
angle = 0;
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -17,7 +17,7 @@
|
|||
|
||||
#include <vector>
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/include/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/include/kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "pad_shapes.h"
|
||||
|
||||
// inflection modes for DS_LINE and DS_LINE_VERTEX, used in math_for_graphics.cpp
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -1,3 +1,3 @@
|
|||
project(kbool)
|
||||
|
||||
subdirs(src samples)
|
||||
subdirs(src)
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -1,405 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file kbool/include/kbool/_dl_itr.h
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: _dl_itr.h,v 1.1 2005/05/24 19:13:35 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
//! author="Klaas Holwerda"
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Definitions of classes, for list implementation
|
||||
* template list and iterator for any list node type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef _DL_Iter_H
|
||||
#define _DL_Iter_H
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(NO_GCC_PRAGMA)
|
||||
#pragma interface
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#include <stdlib.h>
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef _STATUS_ENUM
|
||||
#define _STATUS_ENUM
|
||||
//!<enum Error codes for List and iterator class
|
||||
enum Lerror {
|
||||
NO_MES, /*!<No Message will be generated */
|
||||
NO_LIST, /*!<List is not attached to the iterator*/
|
||||
NO_LIST_OTHER, /*!<no attached list on other iter*/
|
||||
AC_ITER_LIST_OTHER, /*!<iter not allowed on other list */
|
||||
SAME_LIST, /*!<same list not allowed*/
|
||||
NOT_SAME_LIST, /*!<must be same list*/
|
||||
ITER_GT_1, /*!<more then one iteriter at root*/
|
||||
ITER_GT_0, /*!<iter not allowed*/
|
||||
ITER_HITROOT, /*!<iter at root*/
|
||||
NO_ITEM, /*!<no item at current*/
|
||||
NO_NEXT, /*!<no next after current*/
|
||||
NO_PREV, /*!<no prev before current */
|
||||
EMPTY, /*!<list is empty*/
|
||||
NOT_ALLOW, /*!<not allowed*/
|
||||
ITER_NEG /*!<to much iters deleted*/
|
||||
};
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#define SWAP(x,y,t)((t)=(x),(x)=(y),(y)=(t))
|
||||
#define RT _list->_root
|
||||
#define HD _list->_root->_next
|
||||
#define TL _list->_root->_prev
|
||||
#define NB _list->_nbitems
|
||||
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_List;
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_Iter;
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_SortIter;
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class DL_Node
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_Node
|
||||
{
|
||||
friend class DL_List<Dtype>;
|
||||
friend class DL_Iter<Dtype>;
|
||||
friend class DL_SortIter<Dtype>;
|
||||
|
||||
//!Public members
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Template constructor no contents
|
||||
//!Construct a node for a list object
|
||||
DL_Node();
|
||||
|
||||
//!constructor with init of Dtype
|
||||
DL_Node( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Destructor
|
||||
~DL_Node();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Public members
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!data in node
|
||||
Dtype _item;
|
||||
|
||||
//!pointer to next node
|
||||
DL_Node* _next;
|
||||
|
||||
//!pointer to previous node
|
||||
DL_Node* _prev;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//!Template class DL_List
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_List
|
||||
{
|
||||
friend class DL_Iter<Dtype>;
|
||||
friend class DL_SortIter<Dtype>;
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Constructor
|
||||
//!Construct a list object
|
||||
//!!tcarg class | Dtype | list object
|
||||
DL_List();
|
||||
|
||||
//!destructor
|
||||
~DL_List();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Report off List Errors
|
||||
void Error(const char* function,Lerror a_error);
|
||||
|
||||
//!Number of items in the list
|
||||
int count();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Empty List?
|
||||
bool empty();
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert the object given at the end of the list, after tail
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insend( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert the object given at the begin of the list, before head
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insbegin( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!remove the object at the begin of the list (head)
|
||||
void removehead();
|
||||
|
||||
//! remove the object at the end of the list (tail)
|
||||
void removetail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!remove all objects from the list
|
||||
void remove_all( bool deleteObject = false );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Get the item at the head of the list
|
||||
Dtype headitem();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Get the item at the tail of the list
|
||||
Dtype tailitem();
|
||||
|
||||
//! to move all objects in a list to this list.
|
||||
void takeover(DL_List<Dtype>* otherlist);
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!the root node pointer of the list, the first and last node
|
||||
//! in the list are connected to the root node. The root node is used
|
||||
//! to detect the end / beginning of the list while traversing it.
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* _root;
|
||||
|
||||
//!the number of items in the list, if empty list it is 0
|
||||
int _nbitems;
|
||||
|
||||
//!number of iterators on the list, Attaching or instantiating an iterator to list,
|
||||
//! will increment this member, detaching and
|
||||
//! destruction of iterator for a list will decrement this number
|
||||
short int _iterlevel;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class DL_Iter for iterator on DL_List
|
||||
template <class Dtype>
|
||||
class DL_Iter
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Construct an iterator object for a given list of type Dtype
|
||||
DL_Iter(DL_List<Dtype>* newlist);
|
||||
|
||||
//!Constructor of iterator for the same list as another iterator
|
||||
DL_Iter(DL_Iter* otheriter);
|
||||
|
||||
//!Constructor without an attached list
|
||||
DL_Iter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!destructor
|
||||
~DL_Iter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Report off Iterator Errors
|
||||
void Error(const char* function,Lerror a_error);
|
||||
|
||||
//!This attaches an iterator to a list of a given type.
|
||||
void Attach(DL_List<Dtype>* newlist);
|
||||
|
||||
//!This detaches an iterator from a list
|
||||
void Detach();
|
||||
|
||||
//!execute given function for each item in the list/iterator
|
||||
void foreach_f(void (*fp) (Dtype n) );
|
||||
|
||||
//! list mutations
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert after tail item
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insend(Dtype n);
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert before head item
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insbegin(Dtype n);
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert before current iterator position
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insbefore(Dtype n);
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert after current iterator position
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insafter(Dtype n);
|
||||
|
||||
//!to move all objects in a list to the list of the iterator.
|
||||
void takeover(DL_List<Dtype>* otherlist);
|
||||
|
||||
//!to move all objects in a list (using iterator of that list) to the list of the iterator
|
||||
void takeover(DL_Iter* otheriter);
|
||||
|
||||
//! to move maxcount objects in a list (using iterator of that list) to the list of the iterator
|
||||
void takeover(DL_Iter* otheriter, int maxcount);
|
||||
|
||||
//!remove object at current iterator position from the list.
|
||||
void remove();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Remove head item
|
||||
void removehead();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Remove tail item
|
||||
void removetail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Remove all items
|
||||
void remove_all();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/* void foreach_mf(void (Dtype::*mfp)() ); //call Dtype::mfp for each item */
|
||||
|
||||
//!is list empty (contains items or not)?
|
||||
bool empty();
|
||||
|
||||
//!is iterator at root node (begin or end)?
|
||||
bool hitroot();
|
||||
|
||||
//!is iterator at head/first node?
|
||||
bool athead();
|
||||
|
||||
//!is iterator at tail/last node?
|
||||
bool attail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!is given item member of the list
|
||||
bool has(Dtype otheritem);
|
||||
|
||||
//!Number of items in the list
|
||||
int count();
|
||||
|
||||
/* cursor movements */
|
||||
|
||||
//!go to last item, if list is empty goto hite
|
||||
void totail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!go to first item, if list is empty goto hite
|
||||
void tohead();
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to the root (empty dummy) object in the list.
|
||||
void toroot();
|
||||
|
||||
//! set the iterator position to next object in the list ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void operator++ (void);
|
||||
|
||||
//!set iterator to next item (pre fix)
|
||||
void operator++ (int);
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to previous object in the list ( can be the root also)(postfix).
|
||||
void operator-- (void);
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to previous object in the list ( can be the root also)(pre fix).
|
||||
void operator-- (int);
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position n objects in the next direction ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void operator>> (int);
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position n objects in the previous direction ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void operator<< (int);
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to next object in the list, if this would be the root object,
|
||||
//!then set the iterator at the head object
|
||||
void next_wrap();
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to previous object in the list, if this would be the root object,
|
||||
//!then set the iterator at the tail object
|
||||
void prev_wrap();
|
||||
|
||||
//!move root in order to make the current node the tail
|
||||
void reset_tail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!move root in order to make the current node the head
|
||||
void reset_head();
|
||||
|
||||
//!put the iterator at the position of the given object in the list.
|
||||
bool toitem(Dtype);
|
||||
|
||||
//!put the iterator at the same position as the given iterator in the list.
|
||||
void toiter(DL_Iter* otheriter);
|
||||
|
||||
//!put the iterator at the position of the given node in the list.
|
||||
bool tonode(DL_Node<Dtype>*);
|
||||
|
||||
//!iterate through all items of the list
|
||||
bool iterate(void);
|
||||
|
||||
//!To get the item at the current iterator position
|
||||
Dtype item();
|
||||
|
||||
//! get node at iterator
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* node();
|
||||
|
||||
//!sort list with mergesort
|
||||
void mergesort(int (*fcmp) (Dtype, Dtype));
|
||||
|
||||
//!sort list with cocktailsort
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
\return number of swaps done.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int cocktailsort(int (*)(Dtype,Dtype), bool (*)(Dtype,Dtype)=NULL);
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
//!sort list with mergesort
|
||||
void mergesort_rec(int (*fcmp)(Dtype,Dtype), DL_Node<Dtype> *RT1,int n);
|
||||
|
||||
//!sort list with mergesort
|
||||
void mergetwo(int (*fcmp)(Dtype,Dtype), DL_Node<Dtype> *RT1,DL_Node<Dtype> *RT2);
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to next object in the list ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void next();
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to previous object in the list ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void prev();
|
||||
|
||||
//!the list for this iterator
|
||||
DL_List<Dtype> *_list;
|
||||
|
||||
//!the current position of the iterator
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype> *_current;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! template class DL_StackIter class for stack iterator on DL_List
|
||||
template <class Dtype>
|
||||
class DL_StackIter :protected DL_Iter<Dtype>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Constructor of stack iterator for given list
|
||||
DL_StackIter(DL_List<Dtype> *);
|
||||
//!Constructor of stack iterator no list attached
|
||||
DL_StackIter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Destructor of stack iterator
|
||||
~DL_StackIter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Remove all items from the stack
|
||||
void remove_all();
|
||||
//!push given item on the stack
|
||||
void push(Dtype n);
|
||||
//!get last inserted item from stack
|
||||
Dtype pop();
|
||||
//!is stack empty?
|
||||
bool empty();
|
||||
//!number of items on the stack
|
||||
int count();
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//!template class DL_SortIter
|
||||
template <class DType> class DL_SortIter :public DL_Iter<DType>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Constructor of sort iterator for given list and sort function
|
||||
DL_SortIter(DL_List<DType>* nw_list, int (*new_func)(DType ,DType ));
|
||||
|
||||
//!Constructor of sort iterator with sort function and no list attached
|
||||
DL_SortIter(int (*newfunc)(DType,DType));
|
||||
|
||||
//!Destructor of sort iterator
|
||||
~DL_SortIter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert item in sorted order
|
||||
void insert (DType new_item);
|
||||
|
||||
/*override following functions to give an error */
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void insend (bool n){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void insbegin (bool n){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void insbefore (bool n){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void insafter (bool n){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void takeover (DL_List<DType>*){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void takeover (DL_Iter<DType>*){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void takeover (DL_Iter<DType>* otheriter, int maxcount){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void next_wrap() {sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void prev_wrap() {sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void reset_tail() {sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void reset_head() {sortitererror();};
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
//!Report off Iterator Errors
|
||||
void sortitererror();
|
||||
|
||||
//!comparefunction used to insert items in sorted order
|
||||
int (*comparef)(DType, DType);
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/_dl_itr.cpp"
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,269 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file kbool/include/kbool/_lnk_itr.cpp
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: _lnk_itr.cpp,v 1.1 2005/05/24 19:13:36 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef __GNUG__
|
||||
#pragma implementation
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef __UNIX__
|
||||
#include "../include/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
//=======================================================================
|
||||
// implementation class LinkBaseIter
|
||||
//=======================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLI<Type>::TDLI(DL_List<void*>* newlist):DL_Iter<void*>(newlist)
|
||||
{
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLI<Type>::TDLI(DL_Iter<void*>* otheriter):DL_Iter<void*>(otheriter)
|
||||
{
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLI<Type>::TDLI():DL_Iter<void*>()
|
||||
{
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// destructor TDLI
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLI<Type>::~TDLI()
|
||||
{
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::delete_all()
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Node<void*>* node;
|
||||
Type* obj;
|
||||
for (int i=0; i< NB; i++)
|
||||
{
|
||||
node = HD;
|
||||
HD = node->_next;
|
||||
obj=(Type*)(node->_item);
|
||||
delete obj;
|
||||
delete node;
|
||||
}
|
||||
NB=0; //reset memory used (no lost pointers)
|
||||
TL=RT;
|
||||
_current=RT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::foreach_f(void (*fp) (Type* item) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::foreach_f( (void (*)(void*))fp); //call fp for each item
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::foreach_mf(void (Type::*mfp) ())
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
DL_Node<void*>* node=HD; //can be 0 if empty
|
||||
Type* obj;
|
||||
for(int i=0; i< NB; i++)
|
||||
{
|
||||
obj=(Type*)(node->_item);
|
||||
(obj->*mfp)();
|
||||
node=node->_next;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::takeover(DL_List<void*>* otherlist)
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::takeover( (DL_List<void*>*) otherlist);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::takeover(TDLI* otheriter)
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::takeover( (DL_Iter<void*>*) otheriter);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::takeover(TDLI* otheriter,int maxcount)
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::takeover( (DL_Iter<void*>*) otheriter,maxcount);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// is item element of the list?
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
bool TDLI<Type>::has(Type* otheritem)
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::has( (void*) otheritem);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// goto to item
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
bool TDLI<Type>::toitem(Type* item)
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::toitem( (void*) item);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// get current item
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
Type* TDLI<Type>::item()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return (Type*) DL_Iter<void*>::item();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insend(Type* newitem)
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insend( (void*) newitem);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insbegin(Type* newitem)
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insbegin( (void*) newitem);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insbefore(Type* newitem)
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insbefore( (void*) newitem);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insafter(Type* newitem)
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insafter( (void*) newitem);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insend_unsave(Type* newitem)
|
||||
{
|
||||
short int iterbackup=_list->_iterlevel;
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel=0;
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insend( (void*) newitem);
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel=iterbackup;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insbegin_unsave(Type* newitem)
|
||||
{
|
||||
short int iterbackup=_list->_iterlevel;
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel=0;
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insbegin( (void*) newitem);
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel=iterbackup;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insbefore_unsave(Type* newitem)
|
||||
{
|
||||
short int iterbackup=_list->_iterlevel;
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel=0;
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insbefore( (void*) newitem);
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel=iterbackup;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insafter_unsave(Type* newitem)
|
||||
{
|
||||
short int iterbackup=_list->_iterlevel;
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel=0;
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insafter( (void*) newitem);
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel=iterbackup;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::mergesort(int (*f)(Type* a,Type* b))
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::mergesort( (int (*)(void*,void*)) f);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
int TDLI<Type>::cocktailsort(int (*f)(Type* a,Type* b), bool (*f2)(Type* c,Type* d))
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::cocktailsort( (int (*)(void*,void*)) f,( bool(*)(void*,void*)) f2);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLISort<Type>::TDLISort(DL_List<void*>* lista, int (*newfunc)(void*,void*))
|
||||
:DL_SortIter<void*>(lista, newfunc)
|
||||
{
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLISort<Type>::~TDLISort()
|
||||
{
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLISort<Type>::delete_all()
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Node<void*>* node;
|
||||
Type* obj;
|
||||
for (int i=0; i< NB; i++)
|
||||
{
|
||||
node = HD;
|
||||
HD = node->_next;
|
||||
obj=(Type*)(node->_item);
|
||||
delete obj;
|
||||
delete node;
|
||||
}
|
||||
NB=0; //reset memory used (no lost pointers)
|
||||
TL=RT;
|
||||
_current=RT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// is item element of the list?
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
bool TDLISort<Type>::has(Type* otheritem)
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::has( (void*) otheritem);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// goto to item
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
bool TDLISort<Type>::toitem(Type* item)
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::toitem( (void*) item);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// get current item
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
Type* TDLISort<Type>::item()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return (Type*) DL_Iter<void*>::item();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLIStack<Type>::TDLIStack(DL_List<void*>* newlist):DL_StackIter<void*>(newlist)
|
||||
{
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// destructor TDLI
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLIStack<Type>::~TDLIStack()
|
||||
{
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// plaats nieuw item op stack
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLIStack<Type>::push(Type* newitem)
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_StackIter<void*>::push((Type*) newitem);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// haal bovenste item van stack
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
Type* TDLIStack<Type>::pop()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return (Type*) DL_StackIter<void*>::pop();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,163 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file kbool/include/kbool/_lnk_itr.h
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: _lnk_itr.h,v 1.1 2005/05/24 19:13:36 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
//! author="Klaas Holwerda"
|
||||
//! version="1.0"
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Definitions of classes, for list implementation
|
||||
* template list and iterator for any list node type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
#ifndef _LinkBaseIter_H
|
||||
#define _LinkBaseIter_H
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(NO_GCC_PRAGMA)
|
||||
#pragma interface
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
//! headerfiles="_dl_itr.h stdlib.h misc.h gdsmes.h"
|
||||
#include <stdlib.h>
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#define SWAP(x,y,t)((t)=(x),(x)=(y),(y)=(t))
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/_dl_itr.h"
|
||||
|
||||
//! codefiles="_dl_itr.cpp"
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class TDLI
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
class for iterator on DL_List<void*> that is type casted version of DL_Iter
|
||||
\sa DL_Iter for further documentation
|
||||
*/
|
||||
template<class Type> class TDLI : public DL_Iter<void*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!constructor
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
\param list to iterate on.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
TDLI(DL_List<void*>* list);
|
||||
|
||||
//!constructor
|
||||
TDLI(DL_Iter<void*>* otheriter);
|
||||
|
||||
//! nolist constructor
|
||||
TDLI();
|
||||
|
||||
//! destructor
|
||||
~TDLI();
|
||||
|
||||
//!call fp for each item
|
||||
void foreach_f(void (*fp) (Type* item) );
|
||||
|
||||
//!call fp for each item
|
||||
void foreach_mf(void (Type::*fp) () );
|
||||
|
||||
/* list mutations */
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! delete all items
|
||||
void delete_all ();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert at end
|
||||
void insend (Type* n);
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert at begin
|
||||
void insbegin (Type* n);
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert before current
|
||||
void insbefore (Type* n);
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert after current
|
||||
void insafter (Type* n);
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert at end unsave (works even if more then one iterator is on the list
|
||||
//! the user must be sure not to delete/remove items where other iterators
|
||||
//! are pointing to.
|
||||
void insend_unsave (Type* n);
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert at begin unsave (works even if more then one iterator is on the list
|
||||
//! the user must be sure not to delete/remove items where other iterators
|
||||
//! are pointing to.
|
||||
void insbegin_unsave (Type* n);
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert before iterator position unsave (works even if more then one iterator is on the list
|
||||
//! the user must be sure not to delete/remove items where other iterators
|
||||
//! are pointing to.
|
||||
void insbefore_unsave (Type* n);
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert after iterator position unsave (works even if more then one iterator is on the list
|
||||
//! the user must be sure not to delete/remove items where other iterators
|
||||
//! are pointing to.
|
||||
void insafter_unsave (Type* n);
|
||||
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::takeover(DL_List< Dtype >* otherlist )
|
||||
void takeover (DL_List<void*>* otherlist);
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::takeover(DL_Iter* otheriter)
|
||||
void takeover (TDLI* otheriter);
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::takeover(DL_Iter* otheriter, int maxcount)
|
||||
void takeover (TDLI* otheriter, int maxcount);
|
||||
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::has
|
||||
bool has (Type*);
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::toitem
|
||||
bool toitem (Type*);
|
||||
|
||||
//!get the item then iterator is pointing at
|
||||
Type* item ();
|
||||
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::mergesort
|
||||
void mergesort (int (*f)(Type* a,Type* b));
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::cocktailsort
|
||||
int cocktailsort( int (*) (Type* a,Type* b), bool (*) (Type* c,Type* d) = NULL);
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class TDLIsort
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
// class for sort iterator on DL_List<void*> that is type casted version of DL_SortIter
|
||||
// see also inhereted class DL_SortIter for further documentation
|
||||
*/
|
||||
template<class Type> class TDLISort : public DL_SortIter<void*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
//!constructor givin a list and a sort function
|
||||
TDLISort(DL_List<void*>* list, int (*newfunc)(void*,void*));
|
||||
~TDLISort();
|
||||
|
||||
//!delete all items from the list
|
||||
void delete_all();
|
||||
bool has (Type*);
|
||||
bool toitem (Type*);
|
||||
Type* item ();
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class TDLIStack
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
class for iterator on DL_List<void*> that is type casted version of DL_StackIter
|
||||
see also inhereted class DL_StackIter for further documentation
|
||||
*/
|
||||
template<class Type> class TDLIStack : public DL_StackIter<void*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//constructor givin a list
|
||||
TDLIStack(DL_List<void*>* list);
|
||||
|
||||
~TDLIStack();
|
||||
|
||||
void push(Type*);
|
||||
Type* pop();
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#include"../include/_lnk_itr.cpp"
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,544 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file kbool/include/kbool/booleng.h
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: booleng.h,v 1.3 2005/06/11 19:25:12 frm Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef BOOLENG_H
|
||||
#define BOOLENG_H
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(NO_GCC_PRAGMA)
|
||||
#pragma interface
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#include <stdio.h>
|
||||
#include <limits.h>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef A2DKBOOLMAKINGDLL
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP WXEXPORT
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_DATA(type) WXEXPORT type
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_CTORFN
|
||||
#if 0 // Kicad does dot use wxWidgets lib when building the kbool library
|
||||
// but uses wxWidgets. So WXUSINGDLL has no meaning here, but could be defined in makefiles
|
||||
// but must not be used when building kbool
|
||||
#elif defined(WXUSINGDLL)
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP WXIMPORT
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_DATA(type) WXIMPORT type
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_CTORFN
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#else // not making nor using DLL
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_DATA(type) type
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_CTORFN
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#define KBOOL_VERSION "1.8"
|
||||
|
||||
#define KBOOL_DEBUG 0
|
||||
#define KBOOL_LOG 0
|
||||
#define KBOOL_INT64 1
|
||||
|
||||
class KBoolLink;
|
||||
|
||||
#define LINELENGTH 200
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef MAXDOUBLE
|
||||
#undef MAXDOUBLE
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#define MAXDOUBLE 1.7976931348623158e+308
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef KBOOL_INT64
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__UNIX__) || defined(__GNUG__)
|
||||
|
||||
typedef long long B_INT; // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
//#define MAXB_INT LONG_LONG_MAX
|
||||
//#define MINB_INT LONG_LONG_MIN // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
#ifndef MAXB_INT
|
||||
const B_INT MAXB_INT = (0x7fffffffffffffffLL); // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#ifndef MINB_INT
|
||||
const B_INT MINB_INT = (0x8000000000000000LL);
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#else //defined(__UNIX__) || defined(__GNUG__)
|
||||
|
||||
typedef __int64 B_INT; // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
#undef MAXB_INT
|
||||
#undef MINB_INT
|
||||
|
||||
const B_INT MAXB_INT = (0x7fffffffffffffff); // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MINB_INT = (0x8000000000000000);
|
||||
|
||||
#endif //defined(__UNIX__) || defined(__GNUG__)
|
||||
|
||||
#else //KBOOL_INT64
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__UNIX__) || defined(__GNUG__)
|
||||
typedef long B_INT; // 4 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MAXB_INT = (0x7fffffffL); // 4 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MINB_INT = (0x80000000L);
|
||||
#else
|
||||
typedef long B_INT; // 4 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MAXB_INT = (0x7fffffff); // 4 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MINB_INT = (0x80000000);
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#endif //KBOOL_INT64
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT babs(B_INT);
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef M_PI
|
||||
#undef M_PI
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#define M_PI (3.1415926535897932384626433832795028841972)
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef M_PI_2
|
||||
#undef M_PI_2
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#define M_PI_2 1.57079632679489661923
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef M_PI_4
|
||||
#undef M_PI_4
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#define M_PI_4 0.785398163397448309616
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef NULL
|
||||
#define NULL 0
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT bmin(B_INT const value1, B_INT const value2);
|
||||
B_INT bmax(B_INT const value1, B_INT const value2);
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT bmin(B_INT value1, B_INT value2);
|
||||
B_INT bmax(B_INT value1, B_INT value2);
|
||||
|
||||
#include <string.h>
|
||||
|
||||
//! errors in the boolean algorithm will be thrown using this class
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Bool_Engine_Error
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
Bool_Engine_Error(const char* message, const char* header=0, int degree = 9, int fatal = 0);
|
||||
Bool_Engine_Error(const Bool_Engine_Error& a);
|
||||
~Bool_Engine_Error();
|
||||
char* GetErrorMessage();
|
||||
char* GetHeaderMessage();
|
||||
int GetErrorDegree();
|
||||
int GetFatal();
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
char* _message;
|
||||
char* _header;
|
||||
int _degree;
|
||||
int _fatal;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#define KBOOL_LOGFILE "kbool.log"
|
||||
|
||||
enum kbEdgeType
|
||||
{
|
||||
KB_OUTSIDE_EDGE, /*!< edge of the outside contour of a polygon */
|
||||
KB_INSIDE_EDGE, /*!< edge of the inside hole a polygon */
|
||||
KB_FALSE_EDGE /*!< edge to connect holes into polygons */
|
||||
} ;
|
||||
|
||||
enum GroupType
|
||||
{
|
||||
GROUP_A, /*!< to set Group A for polygons */
|
||||
GROUP_B /*!< to set Group A for polygons */
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
enum BOOL_OP
|
||||
{
|
||||
BOOL_NON, /*!< No operation */
|
||||
BOOL_OR, /*!< boolean OR operation */
|
||||
BOOL_AND, /*!< boolean AND operation */
|
||||
BOOL_EXOR, /*!< boolean EX_OR operation */
|
||||
BOOL_A_SUB_B, /*!< boolean Group A - Group B operation */
|
||||
BOOL_B_SUB_A, /*!< boolean Group B - Group A operation */
|
||||
BOOL_CORRECTION, /*!< polygon correction/offset operation */
|
||||
BOOL_SMOOTHEN, /*!< smooth operation */
|
||||
BOOL_MAKERING /*!< create a ring on all polygons */
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
class GraphList;
|
||||
class Graph;
|
||||
class KBoolLink;
|
||||
class Node;
|
||||
template<class Type> class TDLI;
|
||||
|
||||
//! boolean engine to perform operation on two sets of polygons.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
First the engine needs to be filled with polygons.
|
||||
The first operand in the operation is called group A polygons, the second group B.
|
||||
The boolean operation ( BOOL_OR, BOOL_AND, BOOL_EXOR, BOOL_A_SUB_B, BOOL_B_SUB_A )
|
||||
are based on the two sets of polygons in group A and B.
|
||||
The other operation on group A only.
|
||||
|
||||
At the end of the operation the resulting polygons can be extracted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Bool_Engine {
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
//! constructor
|
||||
Bool_Engine();
|
||||
|
||||
//! destructor
|
||||
virtual ~Bool_Engine();
|
||||
|
||||
const char* GetVersion() { return KBOOL_VERSION; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! reports progress of algorithm.
|
||||
virtual void SetState( const char* = 0 );
|
||||
|
||||
//! called at an internal error.
|
||||
virtual void error(const char *text, const char *title);
|
||||
|
||||
//! called at an internal generated possible error.
|
||||
virtual void info(const char *text, const char *title);
|
||||
|
||||
bool Do_Operation(BOOL_OP operation);
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! distance within which points and lines will be snapped towards lines and other points
|
||||
/*
|
||||
The algorithm takes into account gaps and inaccuracies caused by rounding to integer coordinates
|
||||
in the original data.
|
||||
Imagine two rectangles one with a side ( 0,0 ) ( 2.0, 17.0 )
|
||||
and the other has a side ( 0,0 ) ( 1.0, 8.5 )
|
||||
If for some reason those coordinates where round to ( 0,0 ) ( 2, 17 ) ( 0,0 ) ( 1, 9 ),
|
||||
there will be clearly a gap or overlap that was not intended.
|
||||
Even without rounding this effect takes place since there is always a minimum significant bit
|
||||
also when using doubles.
|
||||
|
||||
If the user used as minimum accuracy 0.001, you need to choose Marge > 0.001
|
||||
The boolean engine scales up the input data with GetDGrid() * GetGrid() and rounds the result to
|
||||
integer, So (assuming GRID = 100 DGRID = 1000) a vertex of 123.001 in the user data will
|
||||
become 12300100 internal.
|
||||
At the end of the algorithm the internal vertexes are scaled down again with GetDGrid() * GetGrid(),
|
||||
so 12300103 becomes 123.00103 eventually.
|
||||
So indeed the minimum accuracy might increase, you are free to round again if needed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMarge(double marge);
|
||||
double GetMarge();
|
||||
|
||||
//! input points are scaled up with GetDGrid() * GetGrid()
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Grid makes sure that the integer data used within the algorithm has room for extra intersections
|
||||
smaller than the smallest number within the input data.
|
||||
The input data scaled up with DGrid is related to the accuracy the user has in his input data.
|
||||
Another scaling with Grid is applied on top of it to create space in the integer number for
|
||||
even smaller numbers.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetGrid(B_INT grid);
|
||||
|
||||
//! See SetGrid
|
||||
B_INT GetGrid();
|
||||
|
||||
//! input points are scaled up with GetDGrid() * GetGrid()
|
||||
/*
|
||||
The input data scaled up with DGrid is related to the accuracy the user has in his input data.
|
||||
User data with a minimum accuracy of 0.001, means set the DGrid to 1000.
|
||||
The input data may contain data with a minimum accuracy much smaller, but by setting the DGrid
|
||||
everything smaller than 1/DGrid is rounded.
|
||||
|
||||
DGRID is only meant to make fractional parts of input data which can be
|
||||
doubles, part of the integers used in vertexes within the boolean algorithm.
|
||||
And therefore DGRID bigger than 1 is not usefull, you would only loose accuracy.
|
||||
Within the algorithm all input data is multiplied with DGRID, and the result
|
||||
is rounded to an integer.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDGrid(double dgrid);
|
||||
|
||||
//! See SetDGrid
|
||||
double GetDGrid();
|
||||
|
||||
//! When doing a correction operation ( also known as process offset )
|
||||
//! this defines the detail in the rounded corners.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Depending on the round factor the corners of the polygon may be rounding within the correction
|
||||
algorithm. The detail within this rounded corner is set here.
|
||||
It defines the deviation the generated segments in arc like polygon may have towards the ideal
|
||||
rounded corner using a perfect arc.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetCorrectionAber(double aber);
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetCorrectionAber
|
||||
double GetCorrectionAber();
|
||||
|
||||
//! When doing a correction operation ( also known as process offset )
|
||||
//! this defines the amount of correction.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
The correction algorithm can apply positive and negative offset to polygons.
|
||||
It takes into account closed in areas within a polygon, caused by overlapping/selfintersecting
|
||||
polygons. So holes form that way are corrected proberly, but the overlapping parts itself
|
||||
are left alone. An often used trick to present polygons with holes by linking to the outside
|
||||
boundary, is therefore also handled properly.
|
||||
The algoritm first does a boolean OR operation on the polygon, and seperates holes and
|
||||
outside contours.
|
||||
After this it creates a ring shapes on the above holes and outside contours.
|
||||
This ring shape is added or subtracted from the holes and outside contours.
|
||||
The result is the corrected polygon.
|
||||
If the correction factor is > 0, the outside contours will become larger, while the hole contours
|
||||
will become smaller.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetCorrectionFactor(double aber);
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetCorrectionFactor
|
||||
double GetCorrectionFactor();
|
||||
|
||||
//! used within the smooth algorithm to define how much the smoothed curve may deviate
|
||||
//! from the original.
|
||||
void SetSmoothAber(double aber);
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetSmoothAber
|
||||
double GetSmoothAber();
|
||||
|
||||
//! segments of this size will be left alone in the smooth algorithm.
|
||||
void SetMaxlinemerge(double maxline);
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetMaxlinemerge
|
||||
double GetMaxlinemerge();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Polygon may be filled in different ways (alternate and winding rule).
|
||||
//! This here defines which method will be assumed within the algorithm.
|
||||
void SetWindingRule(bool rule);
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetWindingRule
|
||||
bool GetWindingRule();
|
||||
|
||||
//! the smallest accuracy used within the algorithm for comparing two real numbers.
|
||||
double GetAccur();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Used with in correction/offset algorithm.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
When the polygon contains sharp angles ( < 90 ), after a positive correction the
|
||||
extended parrallel constructed offset lines may leed to extreme offsets on the angles.
|
||||
The length of the crossing generated by the parrallel constructed offset lines
|
||||
towards the original point in the polygon is compared to the offset which needs to be applied.
|
||||
The Roundfactor then decides if this corner will be rounded.
|
||||
A Roundfactor of 1 means that the resulting offset will not be bigger then the correction factor
|
||||
set in the algorithm. Meaning even straight 90 degrees corners will be rounded.
|
||||
A Roundfactor of > sqrt(2) is where 90 corners will be left alone, and smaller corners will be rounded.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRoundfactor(double roundfac);
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetRoundfactor
|
||||
double GetRoundfactor();
|
||||
|
||||
// the following are only be used within the algorithm,
|
||||
// since they are scaled with m_DGRID
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
void SetInternalMarge( B_INT marge );
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
B_INT GetInternalMarge();
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
double GetInternalCorrectionAber();
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
double GetInternalCorrectionFactor();
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
double GetInternalSmoothAber();
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
B_INT GetInternalMaxlinemerge();
|
||||
|
||||
//! in this mode polygons add clockwise, or contours,
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
and polygons added counter clockwise or holes.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetOrientationEntryMode( bool orientationEntryMode ) { m_orientationEntryMode = orientationEntryMode; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetOrientationEntryMode()
|
||||
bool GetOrientationEntryMode() { return m_orientationEntryMode; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! if set true holes are linked into outer contours by double overlapping segments.
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
This mode is needed when the software using the boolean algorithm does
|
||||
not understand hole polygons. In that case a contour and its holes form one
|
||||
polygon. In cases where software understands the concept of holes, contours
|
||||
are clockwise oriented, while holes are anticlockwise oriented.
|
||||
The output of the boolean operations, is following those rules also.
|
||||
But even if extracting the polygons from the engine, each segment is marked such
|
||||
that holes and non holes and linksegments to holes can be recognized.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetLinkHoles( bool doLinkHoles ) { m_doLinkHoles = doLinkHoles; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetLinkHoles()
|
||||
bool GetLinkHoles() { return m_doLinkHoles; }
|
||||
|
||||
//!lof file will be created when set True
|
||||
void SetLog( bool OnOff );
|
||||
|
||||
//! used to write to log file
|
||||
void Write_Log(const char *);
|
||||
//! used to write to log file
|
||||
void Write_Log(const char *, const char *);
|
||||
//! used to write to log file
|
||||
void Write_Log(const char *, double);
|
||||
//! used to write to log file
|
||||
void Write_Log(const char *, B_INT);
|
||||
|
||||
FILE* GetLogFile() { return m_logfile; }
|
||||
|
||||
// methods used to add polygons to the eng using points
|
||||
|
||||
//! Start adding a polygon to the engine
|
||||
/*
|
||||
The boolean operation work on two groups of polygons ( group A or B ),
|
||||
other algorithms are only using group A.
|
||||
|
||||
You add polygons like this to the engine.
|
||||
|
||||
// foreach point in a polygon ...
|
||||
if (booleng->StartPolygonAdd(GROUP_A))
|
||||
{
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint(100,100);
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint(-100,100);
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint(-100,-100);
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint(100,-100);
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
|
||||
\param A_or_B defines if the new polygon will be of group A or B
|
||||
|
||||
Holes or added by adding an inside polygons with opposite orientation compared
|
||||
to another polygon added.
|
||||
So the contour polygon ClockWise, then add counterclockwise polygons for holes, and visa versa.
|
||||
BUT only if m_orientationEntryMode is set true, else all polygons are redirected, and become
|
||||
individual areas without holes.
|
||||
Holes in such a case must be linked into the contour using two extra segments.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool StartPolygonAdd( GroupType A_or_B );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonAdd
|
||||
bool AddPoint(double x, double y);
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonAdd
|
||||
bool EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
|
||||
// methods used to extract polygons from the eng by getting its points
|
||||
|
||||
//! Use after StartPolygonGet()
|
||||
int GetNumPointsInPolygon() { return m_numPtsInPolygon ; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! get resulting polygons at end of an operation
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
// foreach resultant polygon in the booleng ...
|
||||
while ( booleng->StartPolygonGet() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// foreach point in the polygon
|
||||
while ( booleng->PolygonHasMorePoints() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fprintf(stdout,"x = %f\t", booleng->GetPolygonXPoint());
|
||||
fprintf(stdout,"y = %f\n", booleng->GetPolygonYPoint());
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool StartPolygonGet();
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonGet
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
This iterates through the first graph in the graphlist.
|
||||
Setting the current Node properly by following the links in the graph
|
||||
through its nodes.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool PolygonHasMorePoints();
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonGet
|
||||
double GetPolygonXPoint();
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonGet
|
||||
double GetPolygonYPoint();
|
||||
|
||||
//! in the resulting polygons this tells if the current polygon segment is one
|
||||
//! used to link holes into the outer contour of the surrounding polygon
|
||||
bool GetHoleConnectionSegment();
|
||||
|
||||
//! in the resulting polygons this tells if the current polygon segment is part
|
||||
//! of a hole within a polygon.
|
||||
bool GetHoleSegment();
|
||||
|
||||
//! an other way to get the type of segment.
|
||||
kbEdgeType GetPolygonPointEdgeType();
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonGet()
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
Removes a graph from the graphlist.
|
||||
Called after an extraction of an output polygon was done.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
bool m_doLog;
|
||||
|
||||
//! contains polygons in graph form
|
||||
GraphList* m_graphlist;
|
||||
|
||||
double m_MARGE;
|
||||
B_INT m_GRID;
|
||||
double m_DGRID;
|
||||
double m_CORRECTIONABER;
|
||||
double m_CORRECTIONFACTOR;
|
||||
double m_SMOOTHABER;
|
||||
double m_MAXLINEMERGE;
|
||||
bool m_WINDINGRULE;
|
||||
double m_ACCUR;
|
||||
double m_ROUNDFACTOR;
|
||||
|
||||
bool m_orientationEntryMode;
|
||||
|
||||
bool m_doLinkHoles;
|
||||
|
||||
//! used in the StartPolygonAdd, AddPt, EndPolygonAdd sequence
|
||||
Graph* m_GraphToAdd;
|
||||
//! used in the StartPolygonAdd, AddPt, EndPolygonAdd sequence
|
||||
Node* m_lastNodeToAdd;
|
||||
//! used in the StartPolygonAdd, AddPt, EndPolygonAdd sequence
|
||||
Node* m_firstNodeToAdd;
|
||||
|
||||
//! the current group type ( group A or B )
|
||||
GroupType m_groupType;
|
||||
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
Graph* m_getGraph;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
KBoolLink* m_getLink;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
Node* m_getNode;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
double m_PolygonXPoint;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
double m_PolygonYPoint;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
int m_numPtsInPolygon;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
int m_numNodesVisited;
|
||||
|
||||
FILE* m_logfile;
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
//! use in Node to iterate links.
|
||||
TDLI<KBoolLink>* _linkiter;
|
||||
|
||||
//! how many time run intersections fase.
|
||||
unsigned int m_intersectionruns;
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,211 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file ../include/../graph.h
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: graph.h,v 1.1 2005/05/24 19:13:37 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
/* @@(#) $Source: /cvsroot/wxart2d/wxArt2D/modules/../include/graph.h,v $ $Revision: 1.1 $ $Date: 2005/05/24 19:13:37 $ */
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Program GRAPH.H
|
||||
Purpose Used to Intercect and other process functions
|
||||
Last Update 03-04-1996
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef GRAPH_H
|
||||
#define GRAPH_H
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(NO_GCC_PRAGMA)
|
||||
#pragma interface
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/link.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/line.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/scanbeam.h"
|
||||
|
||||
class Node;
|
||||
|
||||
class GraphList;
|
||||
|
||||
//! one graph containing links that cab be connected.
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Graph
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
Graph(Bool_Engine* GC);
|
||||
Graph(KBoolLink*,Bool_Engine* GC);
|
||||
|
||||
Graph( Graph* other );
|
||||
|
||||
~Graph();
|
||||
|
||||
bool GetBin() { return _bin; };
|
||||
void SetBin(bool b) { _bin = b; };
|
||||
|
||||
void Prepare( int intersectionruns );
|
||||
void RoundInt(B_INT grid);
|
||||
void Rotate(bool plus90);
|
||||
|
||||
//! adds a link to the linklist
|
||||
void AddLink(Node *begin,Node *end);
|
||||
|
||||
//! adds a link to the linklist
|
||||
void AddLink(KBoolLink *a_link);
|
||||
|
||||
bool AreZeroLines(B_INT Marge);
|
||||
|
||||
//! Delete parallel lines
|
||||
void DeleteDoubles();
|
||||
|
||||
//! delete zerolines
|
||||
bool DeleteZeroLines(B_INT Marge);
|
||||
bool RemoveNullLinks();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Process found intersections
|
||||
void ProcessCrossings();
|
||||
//! set flags for operations based on group
|
||||
void Set_Operation_Flags();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Left Right values
|
||||
void Remove_IN_Links();
|
||||
|
||||
//! reset bin and mark flags in links.
|
||||
void ResetBinMark();
|
||||
|
||||
// Remove unused links
|
||||
void ReverseAllLinks();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Simplify the graph
|
||||
bool Simplify( B_INT Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! Takes over all links of the argument
|
||||
bool Smoothen( B_INT Marge);
|
||||
|
||||
void TakeOver(Graph*);
|
||||
|
||||
//! function for maximum performance
|
||||
|
||||
//! Get the First link from the graph
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetFirstLink();
|
||||
Node* GetTopNode();
|
||||
void SetBeenHere(bool);
|
||||
void Reset_flags();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Set the group of a graph
|
||||
void SetGroup(GroupType);
|
||||
|
||||
//! Set the number of the graph
|
||||
void SetNumber(int);
|
||||
void Reset_Mark_and_Bin();
|
||||
bool GetBeenHere();
|
||||
int GetGraphNum();
|
||||
int GetNumberOfLinks();
|
||||
|
||||
void Boolean(BOOL_OP operation,GraphList* Result);
|
||||
void Correction(GraphList* Result,double factor);
|
||||
void MakeRing(GraphList* Result,double factor);
|
||||
void CreateRing(GraphList *ring,double factor);
|
||||
void CreateRing_fast(GraphList *ring,double factor);
|
||||
void CreateArc(Node* center, KBoolLine* incoming, Node* end,double radius,double aber);
|
||||
void CreateArc(Node* center, Node* begin, Node* end,double radius,bool clock,double aber);
|
||||
void MakeOneDirection();
|
||||
void Make_Rounded_Shape(KBoolLink* a_link, double factor);
|
||||
bool MakeClockWise();
|
||||
bool writegraph(bool linked);
|
||||
bool writeintersections();
|
||||
void WriteKEY( Bool_Engine* GC, FILE* file = NULL );
|
||||
void WriteGraphKEY( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
//! Extracts partical polygons from the graph
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Links are sorted in XY at beginpoint. Bin and mark flag are reset.
|
||||
Next start to collect subparts from the graph, setting the links bin for all found parts.
|
||||
The parts are searched starting at a topleft corner NON set bin flag link.
|
||||
Found parts are numbered, to be easily split into to real sperate graphs by Split()
|
||||
|
||||
\param operation operation to collect for.
|
||||
\param detecthole if you want holes detected, influences also way of extraction.
|
||||
\param foundholes when holes are found this flag is set true, but only if detecthole is set true.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Extract_Simples(BOOL_OP operation, bool detecthole, bool& foundholes );
|
||||
|
||||
//! split graph into small graph, using the numbers in links.
|
||||
void Split(GraphList* partlist);
|
||||
|
||||
//! Collect a graph by starting at argument link
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Called from Extract_Simples, and assumes sorted links with bin flag unset for non extarted piece
|
||||
|
||||
Collect graphs pieces from a total graph, by following links set to a given boolean operation.
|
||||
\param current_node start node to collect
|
||||
\param operation operation to collect for.
|
||||
\param detecthole if you want holes detected, influences also way of extraction.
|
||||
\param graphnumber number to be given to links in the extracted graph piece
|
||||
\param foundholes when holes are found this flag is set true.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void CollectGraph(Node *current_node, BOOL_OP operation, bool detecthole,int graphnumber, bool& foundholes );
|
||||
|
||||
void CollectGraphLast(Node *current_node, BOOL_OP operation, bool detecthole,int graphnumber, bool& foundholes );
|
||||
|
||||
//! find a link not bin in the top left corner ( links should be sorted already )
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
Last found position is used to find it quickly.
|
||||
Used in ExtractSimples()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Node* GetMostTopLeft(TDLI<KBoolLink>* _LI);
|
||||
|
||||
//! calculates crossing for all links in a graph, and add those as part of the graph.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
It is not just crossings calculation, snapping close nodes is part of it.
|
||||
This is not done at maximum stability in economic time.
|
||||
There are faster ways, but hardly ever they solve the problems, and they do not snap.
|
||||
Here it is on purpose split into separate steps, to get a better result in snapping, and
|
||||
to reach a better stability.
|
||||
|
||||
\param Marge nodes and lines closer to eachother then this, are merged.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CalculateCrossings(B_INT Marge);
|
||||
|
||||
//! equal nodes in position are merged into one.
|
||||
int Merge_NodeToNode(B_INT Marge);
|
||||
|
||||
//! basic scan algorithm with a sweeping beam are line.
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
\param scantype a different face in the algorithm.
|
||||
\param holes to detect hole when needed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int ScanGraph2( SCANTYPE scantype, bool& holes );
|
||||
|
||||
//! links not used for a certain operation can be deleted, simplifying extraction
|
||||
void DeleteNonCond(BOOL_OP operation);
|
||||
|
||||
//! links not used for a certain operation can be set bin, simplifying extraction
|
||||
void HandleNonCond(BOOL_OP operation);
|
||||
|
||||
//! debug
|
||||
bool checksort();
|
||||
|
||||
//! used in correction/offset algorithm
|
||||
bool Small(B_INT howsmall);
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bool _bin;
|
||||
|
||||
DL_List<void*>* _linklist;
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file ../include/../graphlst.h
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: graphlst.h,v 1.1 2005/05/24 19:13:37 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
/* @@(#) $Source: /cvsroot/wxart2d/wxArt2D/modules/../include/graphlst.h,v $ $Revision: 1.1 $ $Date: 2005/05/24 19:13:37 $ */
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Program GRAPHLST.H
|
||||
Purpose Implements a list of graphs (header)
|
||||
Last Update 11-03-1996
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef GRAPHLIST_H
|
||||
#define GRAPHLIST_H
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(NO_GCC_PRAGMA)
|
||||
#pragma interface
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/graph.h"
|
||||
|
||||
class Debug_driver;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP GraphList: public DL_List<void*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
GraphList(Bool_Engine* GC);
|
||||
|
||||
GraphList( GraphList* other );
|
||||
|
||||
~GraphList();
|
||||
|
||||
void MakeOneGraph(Graph *total);
|
||||
|
||||
void Prepare(Graph *total);
|
||||
void MakeRings();
|
||||
void Correction();
|
||||
|
||||
void Simplify( double marge);
|
||||
void Smoothen( double marge);
|
||||
void Merge();
|
||||
void Boolean(BOOL_OP operation, int intersectionRunsMax );
|
||||
|
||||
void WriteGraphs();
|
||||
void WriteGraphsKEY( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
void Renumber();
|
||||
void UnMarkAll();
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
|
@ -0,0 +1,405 @@
|
|||
/*! \file kbool/include/kbool/_dl_itr.h
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: _dl_itr.h,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:21 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
//! author="Klaas Holwerda"
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Definitions of classes, for list implementation
|
||||
* template list and iterator for any list node type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef _DL_Iter_H
|
||||
#define _DL_Iter_H
|
||||
|
||||
#define _CRT_SECURE_CPP_OVERLOAD_STANDARD_NAMES 1
|
||||
#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_DEPRECATE 1
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include <stdlib.h>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef _STATUS_ENUM
|
||||
#define _STATUS_ENUM
|
||||
//!<enum Error codes for List and iterator class
|
||||
enum Lerror {
|
||||
NO_MES, /*!<No Message will be generated */
|
||||
NO_LIST, /*!<List is not attached to the iterator*/
|
||||
NO_LIST_OTHER, /*!<no attached list on other iter*/
|
||||
AC_ITER_LIST_OTHER, /*!<iter not allowed on other list */
|
||||
SAME_LIST, /*!<same list not allowed*/
|
||||
NOT_SAME_LIST, /*!<must be same list*/
|
||||
ITER_GT_1, /*!<more then one iteriter at root*/
|
||||
ITER_GT_0, /*!<iter not allowed*/
|
||||
ITER_HITROOT, /*!<iter at root*/
|
||||
NO_ITEM, /*!<no item at current*/
|
||||
NO_NEXT, /*!<no next after current*/
|
||||
NO_PREV, /*!<no prev before current */
|
||||
EMPTY, /*!<list is empty*/
|
||||
NOT_ALLOW, /*!<not allowed*/
|
||||
ITER_NEG /*!<to much iters deleted*/
|
||||
};
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#define SWAP(x,y,t)((t)=(x),(x)=(y),(y)=(t))
|
||||
#define RT _list->_root
|
||||
#define HD _list->_root->_next
|
||||
#define TL _list->_root->_prev
|
||||
#define NB _list->_nbitems
|
||||
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_List;
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_Iter;
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_SortIter;
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class DL_Node
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_Node
|
||||
{
|
||||
friend class DL_List<Dtype>;
|
||||
friend class DL_Iter<Dtype>;
|
||||
friend class DL_SortIter<Dtype>;
|
||||
|
||||
//!Public members
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Template constructor no contents
|
||||
//!Construct a node for a list object
|
||||
DL_Node();
|
||||
|
||||
//!constructor with init of Dtype
|
||||
DL_Node( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Destructor
|
||||
~DL_Node();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Public members
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!data in node
|
||||
Dtype _item;
|
||||
|
||||
//!pointer to next node
|
||||
DL_Node* _next;
|
||||
|
||||
//!pointer to previous node
|
||||
DL_Node* _prev;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//!Template class DL_List
|
||||
template <class Dtype> class DL_List
|
||||
{
|
||||
friend class DL_Iter<Dtype>;
|
||||
friend class DL_SortIter<Dtype>;
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Constructor
|
||||
//!Construct a list object
|
||||
//!!tcarg class | Dtype | list object
|
||||
DL_List();
|
||||
|
||||
//!destructor
|
||||
~DL_List();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Report off List Errors
|
||||
void Error( const char* function, Lerror a_error );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Number of items in the list
|
||||
int count();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Empty List?
|
||||
bool empty();
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert the object given at the end of the list, after tail
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insend( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert the object given at the begin of the list, before head
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insbegin( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!remove the object at the begin of the list (head)
|
||||
void removehead();
|
||||
|
||||
//! remove the object at the end of the list (tail)
|
||||
void removetail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!remove all objects from the list
|
||||
void remove_all( bool deleteObject = false );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Get the item at the head of the list
|
||||
Dtype headitem();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Get the item at the tail of the list
|
||||
Dtype tailitem();
|
||||
|
||||
//! to move all objects in a list to this list.
|
||||
void takeover( DL_List<Dtype>* otherlist );
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!the root node pointer of the list, the first and last node
|
||||
//! in the list are connected to the root node. The root node is used
|
||||
//! to detect the end / beginning of the list while traversing it.
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* _root;
|
||||
|
||||
//!the number of items in the list, if empty list it is 0
|
||||
int _nbitems;
|
||||
|
||||
//!number of iterators on the list, Attaching or instantiating an iterator to list,
|
||||
//! will increment this member, detaching and
|
||||
//! destruction of iterator for a list will decrement this number
|
||||
short int _iterlevel;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class DL_Iter for iterator on DL_List
|
||||
template <class Dtype>
|
||||
class DL_Iter
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Construct an iterator object for a given list of type Dtype
|
||||
DL_Iter( DL_List<Dtype>* newlist );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Constructor of iterator for the same list as another iterator
|
||||
DL_Iter( DL_Iter* otheriter );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Constructor without an attached list
|
||||
DL_Iter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!destructor
|
||||
~DL_Iter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Report off Iterator Errors
|
||||
void Error( const char* function, Lerror a_error );
|
||||
|
||||
//!This attaches an iterator to a list of a given type.
|
||||
void Attach( DL_List<Dtype>* newlist );
|
||||
|
||||
//!This detaches an iterator from a list
|
||||
void Detach();
|
||||
|
||||
//!execute given function for each item in the list/iterator
|
||||
void foreach_f( void ( *fp ) ( Dtype n ) );
|
||||
|
||||
//! list mutations
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert after tail item
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insend( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert before head item
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insbegin( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert before current iterator position
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insbefore( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert after current iterator position
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* insafter( Dtype n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!to move all objects in a list to the list of the iterator.
|
||||
void takeover( DL_List<Dtype>* otherlist );
|
||||
|
||||
//!to move all objects in a list (using iterator of that list) to the list of the iterator
|
||||
void takeover( DL_Iter* otheriter );
|
||||
|
||||
//! to move maxcount objects in a list (using iterator of that list) to the list of the iterator
|
||||
void takeover( DL_Iter* otheriter, int maxcount );
|
||||
|
||||
//!remove object at current iterator position from the list.
|
||||
void remove();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Remove head item
|
||||
void removehead();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Remove tail item
|
||||
void removetail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Remove all items
|
||||
void remove_all();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
/* void foreach_mf(void (Dtype::*mfp)() ); //call Dtype::mfp for each item */
|
||||
|
||||
//!is list empty (contains items or not)?
|
||||
bool empty();
|
||||
|
||||
//!is iterator at root node (begin or end)?
|
||||
bool hitroot();
|
||||
|
||||
//!is iterator at head/first node?
|
||||
bool athead();
|
||||
|
||||
//!is iterator at tail/last node?
|
||||
bool attail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!is given item member of the list
|
||||
bool has( Dtype otheritem );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Number of items in the list
|
||||
int count();
|
||||
|
||||
/* cursor movements */
|
||||
|
||||
//!go to last item, if list is empty goto hite
|
||||
void totail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!go to first item, if list is empty goto hite
|
||||
void tohead();
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to the root (empty dummy) object in the list.
|
||||
void toroot();
|
||||
|
||||
//! set the iterator position to next object in the list ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void operator++ ( void );
|
||||
|
||||
//!set iterator to next item (pre fix)
|
||||
void operator++ ( int );
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to previous object in the list ( can be the root also)(postfix).
|
||||
void operator-- ( void );
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to previous object in the list ( can be the root also)(pre fix).
|
||||
void operator-- ( int );
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position n objects in the next direction ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void operator>> ( int );
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position n objects in the previous direction ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void operator<< ( int );
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to next object in the list, if this would be the root object,
|
||||
//!then set the iterator at the head object
|
||||
void next_wrap();
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to previous object in the list, if this would be the root object,
|
||||
//!then set the iterator at the tail object
|
||||
void prev_wrap();
|
||||
|
||||
//!move root in order to make the current node the tail
|
||||
void reset_tail();
|
||||
|
||||
//!move root in order to make the current node the head
|
||||
void reset_head();
|
||||
|
||||
//!put the iterator at the position of the given object in the list.
|
||||
bool toitem( Dtype );
|
||||
|
||||
//!put the iterator at the same position as the given iterator in the list.
|
||||
void toiter( DL_Iter* otheriter );
|
||||
|
||||
//!put the iterator at the position of the given node in the list.
|
||||
bool tonode( DL_Node<Dtype>* );
|
||||
|
||||
//!iterate through all items of the list
|
||||
bool iterate( void );
|
||||
|
||||
//!To get the item at the current iterator position
|
||||
Dtype item();
|
||||
|
||||
//! get node at iterator
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype>* node();
|
||||
|
||||
//!sort list with mergesort
|
||||
void mergesort( int ( *fcmp ) ( Dtype, Dtype ) );
|
||||
|
||||
//!sort list with cocktailsort
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
\return number of swaps done.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int cocktailsort( int ( * )( Dtype, Dtype ), bool ( * )( Dtype, Dtype ) = NULL );
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
//!sort list with mergesort
|
||||
void mergesort_rec( int ( *fcmp )( Dtype, Dtype ), DL_Node<Dtype> *RT1, int n );
|
||||
|
||||
//!sort list with mergesort
|
||||
void mergetwo( int ( *fcmp )( Dtype, Dtype ), DL_Node<Dtype> *RT1, DL_Node<Dtype> *RT2 );
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to next object in the list ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void next();
|
||||
|
||||
//!set the iterator position to previous object in the list ( can be the root also).
|
||||
void prev();
|
||||
|
||||
//!the list for this iterator
|
||||
DL_List<Dtype> *_list;
|
||||
|
||||
//!the current position of the iterator
|
||||
DL_Node<Dtype> *_current;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! template class DL_StackIter class for stack iterator on DL_List
|
||||
template <class Dtype>
|
||||
class DL_StackIter : protected DL_Iter<Dtype>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Constructor of stack iterator for given list
|
||||
DL_StackIter( DL_List<Dtype> * );
|
||||
//!Constructor of stack iterator no list attached
|
||||
DL_StackIter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Destructor of stack iterator
|
||||
~DL_StackIter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!Remove all items from the stack
|
||||
void remove_all();
|
||||
//!push given item on the stack
|
||||
void push( Dtype n );
|
||||
//!get last inserted item from stack
|
||||
Dtype pop();
|
||||
//!is stack empty?
|
||||
bool empty();
|
||||
//!number of items on the stack
|
||||
int count();
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//!template class DL_SortIter
|
||||
template <class DType> class DL_SortIter : public DL_Iter<DType>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!Constructor of sort iterator for given list and sort function
|
||||
DL_SortIter( DL_List<DType>* nw_list, int ( *new_func )( DType , DType ) );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Constructor of sort iterator with sort function and no list attached
|
||||
DL_SortIter( int ( *newfunc )( DType, DType ) );
|
||||
|
||||
//!Destructor of sort iterator
|
||||
~DL_SortIter();
|
||||
|
||||
//!insert item in sorted order
|
||||
void insert ( DType new_item );
|
||||
|
||||
/*override following functions to give an error */
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void insend ( bool n ){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void insbegin ( bool n ){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void insbefore ( bool n ){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void insafter ( bool n ){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void takeover ( DL_List<DType>* ){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void takeover ( DL_Iter<DType>* ){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void takeover ( DL_Iter<DType>* otheriter, int maxcount ){sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void next_wrap() {sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void prev_wrap() {sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void reset_tail() {sortitererror();};
|
||||
//!Not allowed
|
||||
void reset_head() {sortitererror();};
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
//!Report off Iterator Errors
|
||||
void sortitererror();
|
||||
|
||||
//!comparefunction used to insert items in sorted order
|
||||
int ( *comparef )( DType, DType );
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/_dl_itr.cpp"
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,257 @@
|
|||
/*! \file kbool/_lnk_itr.cpp
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: _lnk_itr.cpp,v 1.3 2006/12/13 21:43:33 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef __UNIX__
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
//=======================================================================
|
||||
// implementation class LinkBaseIter
|
||||
//=======================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLI<Type>::TDLI( DL_List<void*>* newlist ): DL_Iter<void*>( newlist )
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLI<Type>::TDLI( DL_Iter<void*>* otheriter ): DL_Iter<void*>( otheriter )
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLI<Type>::TDLI(): DL_Iter<void*>()
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
// destructor TDLI
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLI<Type>::~TDLI()
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::delete_all()
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Node<void*>* node;
|
||||
Type* obj;
|
||||
for ( int i = 0; i < NB; i++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
node = HD;
|
||||
HD = node->_next;
|
||||
obj = ( Type* )( node->_item );
|
||||
delete obj;
|
||||
delete node;
|
||||
}
|
||||
NB = 0; //reset memory used (no lost pointers)
|
||||
TL = RT;
|
||||
_current = RT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::foreach_f( void ( *fp ) ( Type* item ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::foreach_f( ( void ( * )( void* ) )fp ); //call fp for each item
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::foreach_mf( void ( Type::*mfp ) () )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
DL_Node<void*>* node = HD; //can be 0 if empty
|
||||
Type* obj;
|
||||
for( int i = 0; i < NB; i++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
obj = ( Type* )( node->_item );
|
||||
( obj->*mfp )();
|
||||
node = node->_next;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::takeover( DL_List<void*>* otherlist )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::takeover( ( DL_List<void*>* ) otherlist );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::takeover( TDLI* otheriter )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::takeover( ( DL_Iter<void*>* ) otheriter );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::takeover( TDLI* otheriter, int maxcount )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::takeover( ( DL_Iter<void*>* ) otheriter, maxcount );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// is item element of the list?
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
bool TDLI<Type>::has( Type* otheritem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::has( ( void* ) otheritem );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// goto to item
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
bool TDLI<Type>::toitem( Type* item )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::toitem( ( void* ) item );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// get current item
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
Type* TDLI<Type>::item()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( Type* ) DL_Iter<void*>::item();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insend( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insend( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insbegin( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insbegin( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insbefore( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insbefore( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insafter( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insafter( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insend_unsave( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
short int iterbackup = _list->_iterlevel;
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = 0;
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insend( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = iterbackup;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insbegin_unsave( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
short int iterbackup = _list->_iterlevel;
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = 0;
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insbegin( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = iterbackup;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insbefore_unsave( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
short int iterbackup = _list->_iterlevel;
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = 0;
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insbefore( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = iterbackup;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::insafter_unsave( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
short int iterbackup = _list->_iterlevel;
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = 0;
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::insafter( ( void* ) newitem );
|
||||
_list->_iterlevel = iterbackup;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLI<Type>::mergesort( int ( *f )( Type* a, Type* b ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<void*>::mergesort( ( int ( * )( void*, void* ) ) f );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
int TDLI<Type>::cocktailsort( int ( *f )( Type* a, Type* b ), bool ( *f2 )( Type* c, Type* d ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::cocktailsort( ( int ( * )( void*, void* ) ) f, ( bool( * )( void*, void* ) ) f2 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLISort<Type>::TDLISort( DL_List<void*>* lista, int ( *newfunc )( void*, void* ) )
|
||||
: DL_SortIter<void*>( lista, newfunc )
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLISort<Type>::~TDLISort()
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLISort<Type>::delete_all()
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Node<void*>* node;
|
||||
Type* obj;
|
||||
for ( int i = 0; i < NB; i++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
node = HD;
|
||||
HD = node->_next;
|
||||
obj = ( Type* )( node->_item );
|
||||
delete obj;
|
||||
delete node;
|
||||
}
|
||||
NB = 0; //reset memory used (no lost pointers)
|
||||
TL = RT;
|
||||
_current = RT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// is item element of the list?
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
bool TDLISort<Type>::has( Type* otheritem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::has( ( void* ) otheritem );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// goto to item
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
bool TDLISort<Type>::toitem( Type* item )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DL_Iter<void*>::toitem( ( void* ) item );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// get current item
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
Type* TDLISort<Type>::item()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( Type* ) DL_Iter<void*>::item();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLIStack<Type>::TDLIStack( DL_List<void*>* newlist ): DL_StackIter<void*>( newlist )
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
// destructor TDLI
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
TDLIStack<Type>::~TDLIStack()
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
// plaats nieuw item op stack
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
void TDLIStack<Type>::push( Type* newitem )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_StackIter<void*>::push( ( Type* ) newitem );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// haal bovenste item van stack
|
||||
template<class Type>
|
||||
Type* TDLIStack<Type>::pop()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( Type* ) DL_StackIter<void*>::pop();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
|
|||
/*! \file kbool/include/kbool/_lnk_itr.h
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: _lnk_itr.h,v 1.2 2006/12/15 21:00:05 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
//! author="Klaas Holwerda"
|
||||
//! version="1.0"
|
||||
/*
|
||||
* Definitions of classes, for list implementation
|
||||
* template list and iterator for any list node type
|
||||
*/
|
||||
#ifndef _LinkBaseIter_H
|
||||
#define _LinkBaseIter_H
|
||||
|
||||
//! headerfiles="_dl_itr.h stdlib.h misc.h gdsmes.h"
|
||||
#include <stdlib.h>
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#define SWAP(x,y,t)((t)=(x),(x)=(y),(y)=(t))
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/_dl_itr.h"
|
||||
|
||||
//! codefiles="_dl_itr.cpp"
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class TDLI
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
class for iterator on DL_List<void*> that is type casted version of DL_Iter
|
||||
\sa DL_Iter for further documentation
|
||||
*/
|
||||
template<class Type> class TDLI : public DL_Iter<void*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//!constructor
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
\param list to iterate on.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
TDLI( DL_List<void*>* list );
|
||||
|
||||
//!constructor
|
||||
TDLI( DL_Iter<void*>* otheriter );
|
||||
|
||||
//! nolist constructor
|
||||
TDLI();
|
||||
|
||||
//! destructor
|
||||
~TDLI();
|
||||
|
||||
//!call fp for each item
|
||||
void foreach_f( void ( *fp ) ( Type* item ) );
|
||||
|
||||
//!call fp for each item
|
||||
void foreach_mf( void ( Type::*fp ) () );
|
||||
|
||||
/* list mutations */
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! delete all items
|
||||
void delete_all ();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert at end
|
||||
void insend ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert at begin
|
||||
void insbegin ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert before current
|
||||
void insbefore ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert after current
|
||||
void insafter ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert at end unsave (works even if more then one iterator is on the list
|
||||
//! the user must be sure not to delete/remove items where other iterators
|
||||
//! are pointing to.
|
||||
void insend_unsave ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert at begin unsave (works even if more then one iterator is on the list
|
||||
//! the user must be sure not to delete/remove items where other iterators
|
||||
//! are pointing to.
|
||||
void insbegin_unsave ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert before iterator position unsave (works even if more then one iterator is on the list
|
||||
//! the user must be sure not to delete/remove items where other iterators
|
||||
//! are pointing to.
|
||||
void insbefore_unsave ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! insert after iterator position unsave (works even if more then one iterator is on the list
|
||||
//! the user must be sure not to delete/remove items where other iterators
|
||||
//! are pointing to.
|
||||
void insafter_unsave ( Type* n );
|
||||
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::takeover(DL_List< Dtype >* otherlist )
|
||||
void takeover ( DL_List<void*>* otherlist );
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::takeover(DL_Iter* otheriter)
|
||||
void takeover ( TDLI* otheriter );
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::takeover(DL_Iter* otheriter, int maxcount)
|
||||
void takeover ( TDLI* otheriter, int maxcount );
|
||||
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::has
|
||||
bool has ( Type* );
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::toitem
|
||||
bool toitem ( Type* );
|
||||
|
||||
//!get the item then iterator is pointing at
|
||||
Type* item ();
|
||||
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::mergesort
|
||||
void mergesort ( int ( *f )( Type* a, Type* b ) );
|
||||
//! \sa DL_Iter::cocktailsort
|
||||
int cocktailsort( int ( * ) ( Type* a, Type* b ), bool ( * ) ( Type* c, Type* d ) = NULL );
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class TDLIsort
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
// class for sort iterator on DL_List<void*> that is type casted version of DL_SortIter
|
||||
// see also inhereted class DL_SortIter for further documentation
|
||||
*/
|
||||
template<class Type> class TDLISort : public DL_SortIter<void*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
//!constructor givin a list and a sort function
|
||||
TDLISort( DL_List<void*>* list, int ( *newfunc )( void*, void* ) );
|
||||
~TDLISort();
|
||||
|
||||
//!delete all items from the list
|
||||
void delete_all();
|
||||
bool has ( Type* );
|
||||
bool toitem ( Type* );
|
||||
Type* item ();
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
//! Template class TDLIStack
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
class for iterator on DL_List<void*> that is type casted version of DL_StackIter
|
||||
see also inhereted class DL_StackIter for further documentation
|
||||
*/
|
||||
template<class Type> class TDLIStack : public DL_StackIter<void*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
//constructor givin a list
|
||||
TDLIStack( DL_List<void*>* list );
|
||||
|
||||
~TDLIStack();
|
||||
|
||||
void push( Type* );
|
||||
Type* pop();
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#include"kbool/_lnk_itr.cpp"
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,583 @@
|
|||
/*! \file include/booleng.h
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: booleng.h,v 1.4 2008/09/05 19:01:14 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef BOOLENG_H
|
||||
#define BOOLENG_H
|
||||
|
||||
#undef _CRT_SECURE_CPP_OVERLOAD_STANDARD_NAMES
|
||||
#define _CRT_SECURE_CPP_OVERLOAD_STANDARD_NAMES 1
|
||||
#define _CRT_SECURE_NO_DEPRECATE 1
|
||||
|
||||
#include <stdio.h>
|
||||
#include <limits.h>
|
||||
#include <assert.h>
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#if 0 // Kicad does not use kbool in dll version
|
||||
#if defined(__WXMSW__)
|
||||
/*
|
||||
__declspec works in BC++ 5 and later, Watcom C++ 11.0 and later as well
|
||||
as VC++ and gcc
|
||||
*/
|
||||
# if defined(__VISUALC__) || defined(__BORLANDC__) || defined(__GNUC__) || defined(__WATCOMC__)
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT __declspec(dllexport)
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
|
||||
# else /* compiler doesn't support __declspec() */
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT
|
||||
# endif
|
||||
#elif defined(__WXPM__)
|
||||
# if defined (__WATCOMC__)
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT __declspec(dllexport)
|
||||
/*
|
||||
__declspec(dllimport) prepends __imp to imported symbols. We do NOT
|
||||
want that!
|
||||
*/
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT
|
||||
# elif defined(__EMX__)
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT
|
||||
# elif (!(defined(__VISAGECPP__) && (__IBMCPP__ < 400 || __IBMC__ < 400 )))
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT _Export
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT _Export
|
||||
# endif
|
||||
#elif defined(__WXMAC__) || defined(__WXCOCOA__)
|
||||
# ifdef __MWERKS__
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT __declspec(export)
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT __declspec(import)
|
||||
# endif
|
||||
#elif defined(__CYGWIN__)
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT __declspec(dllexport)
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#endif // if 0 for kicad
|
||||
|
||||
/* for other platforms/compilers we don't anything */
|
||||
#ifndef WXEXPORT
|
||||
# define WXEXPORT
|
||||
# define WXIMPORT
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef A2DKBOOLMAKINGDLL
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP WXEXPORT
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_DATA(type) WXEXPORT type
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_CTORFN
|
||||
#elif defined(WXART2D_USINGDLL)
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP WXIMPORT
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_DATA(type) WXIMPORT type
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_CTORFN
|
||||
#else // not making nor using DLL
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_DATA(type) type
|
||||
#define A2DKBOOLDLLEXP_CTORFN
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#define KBOOL_VERSION "1.9"
|
||||
|
||||
#define KBOOL_DEBUG 0
|
||||
#define KBOOL_LOG 0
|
||||
#define KBOOL_INT64 1
|
||||
|
||||
class KBoolLink;
|
||||
|
||||
#define LINELENGTH 200
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef MAXDOUBLE
|
||||
#undef MAXDOUBLE
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#define MAXDOUBLE 1.7976931348623158e+308
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef KBOOL_INT64
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__UNIX__) || defined(__GNUG__)
|
||||
|
||||
typedef long long B_INT; // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
//#define MAXB_INT LONG_LONG_MAX
|
||||
//#define MINB_INT LONG_LONG_MIN // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MAXB_INT = ( 0x7fffffffffffffffLL ); // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MINB_INT = ( 0x8000000000000000LL );
|
||||
|
||||
#else //defined(__UNIX__) || defined(__GNUG__)
|
||||
|
||||
typedef __int64 B_INT; // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
#undef MAXB_INT
|
||||
#undef MINB_INT
|
||||
|
||||
const B_INT MAXB_INT = ( 0x7fffffffffffffff ); // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MINB_INT = ( 0x8000000000000000 );
|
||||
|
||||
#endif //defined(__UNIX__) || defined(__GNUG__)
|
||||
|
||||
#else //KBOOL_INT64
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__UNIX__) || defined(__GNUG__)
|
||||
typedef long B_INT; // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MAXB_INT = ( 0x7fffffffL ); // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MINB_INT = ( 0x80000000L );
|
||||
#else
|
||||
typedef long B_INT; // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MAXB_INT = ( 0x7fffffff ); // 8 bytes integer
|
||||
const B_INT MINB_INT = ( 0x80000000 );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#endif //KBOOL_INT64
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT babs( B_INT );
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef M_PI
|
||||
#undef M_PI
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#define M_PI (3.1415926535897932384626433832795028841972)
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef M_PI_2
|
||||
#undef M_PI_2
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#define M_PI_2 1.57079632679489661923
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef M_PI_4
|
||||
#undef M_PI_4
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#define M_PI_4 0.785398163397448309616
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef NULL
|
||||
#define NULL 0
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT bmin( B_INT const value1, B_INT const value2 );
|
||||
B_INT bmax( B_INT const value1, B_INT const value2 );
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT bmin( B_INT value1, B_INT value2 );
|
||||
B_INT bmax( B_INT value1, B_INT value2 );
|
||||
|
||||
#include <string.h>
|
||||
|
||||
//! errors in the boolean algorithm will be thrown using this class
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Bool_Engine_Error
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
Bool_Engine_Error( const char* message, const char* header = 0, int degree = 9, int fatal = 0 );
|
||||
Bool_Engine_Error( const Bool_Engine_Error& a );
|
||||
~Bool_Engine_Error();
|
||||
char* GetErrorMessage();
|
||||
char* GetHeaderMessage();
|
||||
int GetErrorDegree();
|
||||
int GetFatal();
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
char* _message;
|
||||
char* _header;
|
||||
int _degree;
|
||||
int _fatal;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#define KBOOL_LOGFILE "kbool.log"
|
||||
|
||||
enum kbEdgeType
|
||||
{
|
||||
KB_OUTSIDE_EDGE, /*!< edge of the outside contour of a polygon */
|
||||
KB_INSIDE_EDGE, /*!< edge of the inside hole a polygon */
|
||||
KB_FALSE_EDGE /*!< edge to connect holes into polygons */
|
||||
} ;
|
||||
|
||||
enum GroupType
|
||||
{
|
||||
GROUP_A, /*!< to set Group A for polygons */
|
||||
GROUP_B /*!< to set Group A for polygons */
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
enum BOOL_OP
|
||||
{
|
||||
BOOL_NON, /*!< No operation */
|
||||
BOOL_OR, /*!< boolean OR operation */
|
||||
BOOL_AND, /*!< boolean AND operation */
|
||||
BOOL_EXOR, /*!< boolean EX_OR operation */
|
||||
BOOL_A_SUB_B, /*!< boolean Group A - Group B operation */
|
||||
BOOL_B_SUB_A, /*!< boolean Group B - Group A operation */
|
||||
BOOL_CORRECTION, /*!< polygon correction/offset operation */
|
||||
BOOL_SMOOTHEN, /*!< smooth operation */
|
||||
BOOL_MAKERING /*!< create a ring on all polygons */
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
class GraphList;
|
||||
class Graph;
|
||||
class KBoolLink;
|
||||
class Node;
|
||||
template<class Type> class TDLI;
|
||||
|
||||
//! boolean engine to perform operation on two sets of polygons.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
First the engine needs to be filled with polygons.
|
||||
The first operand in the operation is called group A polygons, the second group B.
|
||||
The boolean operation ( BOOL_OR, BOOL_AND, BOOL_EXOR, BOOL_A_SUB_B, BOOL_B_SUB_A )
|
||||
are based on the two sets of polygons in group A and B.
|
||||
The other operation on group A only.
|
||||
|
||||
At the end of the operation the resulting polygons can be extracted.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Bool_Engine
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
//! constructor
|
||||
Bool_Engine();
|
||||
|
||||
//! destructor
|
||||
virtual ~Bool_Engine();
|
||||
|
||||
const char* GetVersion() { return KBOOL_VERSION; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! reports progress of algorithm.
|
||||
virtual void SetState( const char* = 0 );
|
||||
|
||||
//! called at an internal error.
|
||||
virtual void error( const char *text, const char *title );
|
||||
|
||||
//! called at an internal generated possible error.
|
||||
virtual void info( const char *text, const char *title );
|
||||
|
||||
bool Do_Operation( BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! distance within which points and lines will be snapped towards lines and other points
|
||||
/*
|
||||
The algorithm takes into account gaps and inaccuracies caused by rounding to integer coordinates
|
||||
in the original data.
|
||||
Imagine two rectangles one with a side ( 0,0 ) ( 2.0, 17.0 )
|
||||
and the other has a side ( 0,0 ) ( 1.0, 8.5 )
|
||||
If for some reason those coordinates where round to ( 0,0 ) ( 2, 17 ) ( 0,0 ) ( 1, 9 ),
|
||||
there will be clearly a gap or overlap that was not intended.
|
||||
Even without rounding this effect takes place since there is always a minimum significant bit
|
||||
also when using doubles.
|
||||
|
||||
If the user used as minimum accuracy 0.001, you need to choose Marge > 0.001
|
||||
The boolean engine scales up the input data with GetDGrid() * GetGrid() and rounds the result to
|
||||
integer, So (assuming GRID = 100 DGRID = 1000) a vertex of 123.001 in the user data will
|
||||
become 12300100 internal.
|
||||
At the end of the algorithm the internal vertexes are scaled down again with GetDGrid() * GetGrid(),
|
||||
so 12300103 becomes 123.00103 eventually.
|
||||
So indeed the minimum accuracy might increase, you are free to round again if needed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetMarge( double marge );
|
||||
double GetMarge();
|
||||
|
||||
//! input points are scaled up with GetDGrid() * GetGrid()
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Grid makes sure that the integer data used within the algorithm has room for extra intersections
|
||||
smaller than the smallest number within the input data.
|
||||
The input data scaled up with DGrid is related to the accuracy the user has in his input data.
|
||||
Another scaling with Grid is applied on top of it to create space in the integer number for
|
||||
even smaller numbers.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetGrid( B_INT grid );
|
||||
|
||||
//! See SetGrid
|
||||
B_INT GetGrid();
|
||||
|
||||
//! input points are scaled up with GetDGrid() * GetGrid()
|
||||
/*
|
||||
The input data scaled up with DGrid is related to the accuracy the user has in his input data.
|
||||
User data with a minimum accuracy of 0.001, means set the DGrid to 1000.
|
||||
The input data may contain data with a minimum accuracy much smaller, but by setting the DGrid
|
||||
everything smaller than 1/DGrid is rounded.
|
||||
|
||||
DGRID is only meant to make fractional parts of input data which can be
|
||||
doubles, part of the integers used in vertexes within the boolean algorithm.
|
||||
And therefore DGRID bigger than 1 is not usefull, you would only loose accuracy.
|
||||
Within the algorithm all input data is multiplied with DGRID, and the result
|
||||
is rounded to an integer.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetDGrid( double dgrid );
|
||||
|
||||
//! See SetDGrid
|
||||
double GetDGrid();
|
||||
|
||||
//! When doing a correction operation ( also known as process offset )
|
||||
//! this defines the detail in the rounded corners.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Depending on the round factor the corners of the polygon may be rounding within the correction
|
||||
algorithm. The detail within this rounded corner is set here.
|
||||
It defines the deviation the generated segments in arc like polygon may have towards the ideal
|
||||
rounded corner using a perfect arc.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetCorrectionAber( double aber );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetCorrectionAber
|
||||
double GetCorrectionAber();
|
||||
|
||||
//! When doing a correction operation ( also known as process offset )
|
||||
//! this defines the amount of correction.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
The correction algorithm can apply positive and negative offset to polygons.
|
||||
It takes into account closed in areas within a polygon, caused by overlapping/selfintersecting
|
||||
polygons. So holes form that way are corrected proberly, but the overlapping parts itself
|
||||
are left alone. An often used trick to present polygons with holes by linking to the outside
|
||||
boundary, is therefore also handled properly.
|
||||
The algoritm first does a boolean OR operation on the polygon, and seperates holes and
|
||||
outside contours.
|
||||
After this it creates a ring shapes on the above holes and outside contours.
|
||||
This ring shape is added or subtracted from the holes and outside contours.
|
||||
The result is the corrected polygon.
|
||||
If the correction factor is > 0, the outside contours will become larger, while the hole contours
|
||||
will become smaller.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetCorrectionFactor( double aber );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetCorrectionFactor
|
||||
double GetCorrectionFactor();
|
||||
|
||||
//! used within the smooth algorithm to define how much the smoothed curve may deviate
|
||||
//! from the original.
|
||||
void SetSmoothAber( double aber );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetSmoothAber
|
||||
double GetSmoothAber();
|
||||
|
||||
//! segments of this size will be left alone in the smooth algorithm.
|
||||
void SetMaxlinemerge( double maxline );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetMaxlinemerge
|
||||
double GetMaxlinemerge();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Polygon may be filled in different ways (alternate and winding rule).
|
||||
//! This here defines which method will be assumed within the algorithm.
|
||||
void SetWindingRule( bool rule );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetWindingRule
|
||||
bool GetWindingRule();
|
||||
|
||||
//! the smallest accuracy used within the algorithm for comparing two real numbers.
|
||||
double GetAccur();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Used with in correction/offset algorithm.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
When the polygon contains sharp angles ( < 90 ), after a positive correction the
|
||||
extended parrallel constructed offset lines may leed to extreme offsets on the angles.
|
||||
The length of the crossing generated by the parrallel constructed offset lines
|
||||
towards the original point in the polygon is compared to the offset which needs to be applied.
|
||||
The Roundfactor then decides if this corner will be rounded.
|
||||
A Roundfactor of 1 means that the resulting offset will not be bigger then the correction factor
|
||||
set in the algorithm. Meaning even straight 90 degrees corners will be rounded.
|
||||
A Roundfactor of > sqrt(2) is where 90 corners will be left alone, and smaller corners will be rounded.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetRoundfactor( double roundfac );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetRoundfactor
|
||||
double GetRoundfactor();
|
||||
|
||||
// the following are only be used within the algorithm,
|
||||
// since they are scaled with m_DGRID
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
void SetInternalMarge( B_INT marge );
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
B_INT GetInternalMarge();
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
double GetInternalCorrectionAber();
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
double GetInternalCorrectionFactor();
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
double GetInternalSmoothAber();
|
||||
|
||||
//! only used internal.
|
||||
B_INT GetInternalMaxlinemerge();
|
||||
|
||||
//! in this mode polygons add clockwise, or contours,
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
and polygons added counter clockwise or holes.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetOrientationEntryMode( bool orientationEntryMode ) { m_orientationEntryMode = orientationEntryMode; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetOrientationEntryMode()
|
||||
bool GetOrientationEntryMode() { return m_orientationEntryMode; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! if set true holes are linked into outer contours by double overlapping segments.
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
This mode is needed when the software using the boolean algorithm does
|
||||
not understand hole polygons. In that case a contour and its holes form one
|
||||
polygon. In cases where software understands the concept of holes, contours
|
||||
are clockwise oriented, while holes are anticlockwise oriented.
|
||||
The output of the boolean operations, is following those rules also.
|
||||
But even if extracting the polygons from the engine, each segment is marked such
|
||||
that holes and non holes and linksegments to holes can be recognized.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void SetLinkHoles( bool doLinkHoles ) { m_doLinkHoles = doLinkHoles; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! see SetLinkHoles()
|
||||
bool GetLinkHoles() { return m_doLinkHoles; }
|
||||
|
||||
//!lof file will be created when set True
|
||||
void SetLog( bool OnOff );
|
||||
|
||||
//! used to write to log file
|
||||
void Write_Log( const char * );
|
||||
//! used to write to log file
|
||||
void Write_Log( const char *, const char * );
|
||||
//! used to write to log file
|
||||
void Write_Log( const char *, double );
|
||||
//! used to write to log file
|
||||
void Write_Log( const char *, B_INT );
|
||||
|
||||
FILE* GetLogFile() { return m_logfile; }
|
||||
|
||||
// methods used to add polygons to the eng using points
|
||||
|
||||
//! Start adding a polygon to the engine
|
||||
/*
|
||||
The boolean operation work on two groups of polygons ( group A or B ),
|
||||
other algorithms are only using group A.
|
||||
|
||||
You add polygons like this to the engine.
|
||||
|
||||
// foreach point in a polygon ...
|
||||
if (booleng->StartPolygonAdd(GROUP_A))
|
||||
{
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint(100,100);
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint(-100,100);
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint(-100,-100);
|
||||
booleng->AddPoint(100,-100);
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
|
||||
\param A_or_B defines if the new polygon will be of group A or B
|
||||
|
||||
Holes or added by adding an inside polygons with opposite orientation compared
|
||||
to another polygon added.
|
||||
So the contour polygon ClockWise, then add counterclockwise polygons for holes, and visa versa.
|
||||
BUT only if m_orientationEntryMode is set true, else all polygons are redirected, and become
|
||||
individual areas without holes.
|
||||
Holes in such a case must be linked into the contour using two extra segments.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool StartPolygonAdd( GroupType A_or_B );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonAdd
|
||||
bool AddPoint( double x, double y );
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonAdd
|
||||
bool EndPolygonAdd();
|
||||
|
||||
// methods used to extract polygons from the eng by getting its points
|
||||
|
||||
//! Use after StartPolygonGet()
|
||||
int GetNumPointsInPolygon() { return m_numPtsInPolygon ; }
|
||||
|
||||
//! get resulting polygons at end of an operation
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
// foreach resultant polygon in the booleng ...
|
||||
while ( booleng->StartPolygonGet() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// foreach point in the polygon
|
||||
while ( booleng->PolygonHasMorePoints() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fprintf(stdout,"x = %f\t", booleng->GetPolygonXPoint());
|
||||
fprintf(stdout,"y = %f\n", booleng->GetPolygonYPoint());
|
||||
}
|
||||
booleng->EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool StartPolygonGet();
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonGet
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
This iterates through the first graph in the graphlist.
|
||||
Setting the current Node properly by following the links in the graph
|
||||
through its nodes.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool PolygonHasMorePoints();
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonGet
|
||||
double GetPolygonXPoint();
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonGet
|
||||
double GetPolygonYPoint();
|
||||
|
||||
//! in the resulting polygons this tells if the current polygon segment is one
|
||||
//! used to link holes into the outer contour of the surrounding polygon
|
||||
bool GetHoleConnectionSegment();
|
||||
|
||||
//! in the resulting polygons this tells if the current polygon segment is part
|
||||
//! of a hole within a polygon.
|
||||
bool GetHoleSegment();
|
||||
|
||||
//! an other way to get the type of segment.
|
||||
kbEdgeType GetPolygonPointEdgeType();
|
||||
|
||||
//! see StartPolygonGet()
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
Removes a graph from the graphlist.
|
||||
Called after an extraction of an output polygon was done.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void EndPolygonGet();
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
bool m_doLog;
|
||||
|
||||
//! contains polygons in graph form
|
||||
GraphList* m_graphlist;
|
||||
|
||||
double m_MARGE;
|
||||
B_INT m_GRID;
|
||||
double m_DGRID;
|
||||
double m_CORRECTIONABER;
|
||||
double m_CORRECTIONFACTOR;
|
||||
double m_SMOOTHABER;
|
||||
double m_MAXLINEMERGE;
|
||||
bool m_WINDINGRULE;
|
||||
double m_ACCUR;
|
||||
double m_ROUNDFACTOR;
|
||||
|
||||
bool m_orientationEntryMode;
|
||||
|
||||
bool m_doLinkHoles;
|
||||
|
||||
//! used in the StartPolygonAdd, AddPt, EndPolygonAdd sequence
|
||||
Graph* m_GraphToAdd;
|
||||
//! used in the StartPolygonAdd, AddPt, EndPolygonAdd sequence
|
||||
Node* m_lastNodeToAdd;
|
||||
//! used in the StartPolygonAdd, AddPt, EndPolygonAdd sequence
|
||||
Node* m_firstNodeToAdd;
|
||||
|
||||
//! the current group type ( group A or B )
|
||||
GroupType m_groupType;
|
||||
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
Graph* m_getGraph;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
KBoolLink* m_getLink;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
Node* m_getNode;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
double m_PolygonXPoint;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
double m_PolygonYPoint;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
int m_numPtsInPolygon;
|
||||
//! used in extracting the points from the resultant polygons
|
||||
int m_numNodesVisited;
|
||||
|
||||
FILE* m_logfile;
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
//! use in Node to iterate links.
|
||||
TDLI<KBoolLink>* _linkiter;
|
||||
|
||||
//! how many time run intersections fase.
|
||||
unsigned int m_intersectionruns;
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
|
|||
/*! \file include/graph.h
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: graph.h,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:21 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
/* @@(#) $Source: /cvsroot/wxart2d/wxArt2D/thirdparty/kbool/include/kbool/graph.h,v $ $Revision: 1.3 $ $Date: 2008/06/04 21:23:21 $ */
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Program GRAPH.H
|
||||
Purpose Used to Intercect and other process functions
|
||||
Last Update 03-04-1996
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef GRAPH_H
|
||||
#define GRAPH_H
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/line.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/scanbeam.h"
|
||||
|
||||
class Node;
|
||||
|
||||
class GraphList;
|
||||
|
||||
//! one graph containing links that cab be connected.
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Graph
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
Graph( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
Graph( KBoolLink*, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
Graph( Graph* other );
|
||||
|
||||
~Graph();
|
||||
|
||||
bool GetBin() { return _bin; };
|
||||
void SetBin( bool b ) { _bin = b; };
|
||||
|
||||
void Prepare( int intersectionruns );
|
||||
void RoundInt( B_INT grid );
|
||||
void Rotate( bool plus90 );
|
||||
|
||||
//! adds a link to the linklist
|
||||
void AddLink( Node *begin, Node *end );
|
||||
|
||||
//! adds a link to the linklist
|
||||
void AddLink( KBoolLink *a_link );
|
||||
|
||||
bool AreZeroLines( B_INT Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Delete parallel lines
|
||||
void DeleteDoubles();
|
||||
|
||||
//! delete zerolines
|
||||
bool DeleteZeroLines( B_INT Marge );
|
||||
bool RemoveNullLinks();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Process found intersections
|
||||
void ProcessCrossings();
|
||||
//! set flags for operations based on group
|
||||
void Set_Operation_Flags();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Left Right values
|
||||
void Remove_IN_Links();
|
||||
|
||||
//! reset bin and mark flags in links.
|
||||
void ResetBinMark();
|
||||
|
||||
// Remove unused links
|
||||
void ReverseAllLinks();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Simplify the graph
|
||||
bool Simplify( B_INT Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! Takes over all links of the argument
|
||||
bool Smoothen( B_INT Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
void TakeOver( Graph* );
|
||||
|
||||
//! function for maximum performance
|
||||
|
||||
//! Get the First link from the graph
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetFirstLink();
|
||||
Node* GetTopNode();
|
||||
void SetBeenHere( bool );
|
||||
void Reset_flags();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Set the group of a graph
|
||||
void SetGroup( GroupType );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Set the number of the graph
|
||||
void SetNumber( int );
|
||||
void Reset_Mark_and_Bin();
|
||||
bool GetBeenHere();
|
||||
int GetGraphNum();
|
||||
int GetNumberOfLinks();
|
||||
|
||||
void Boolean( BOOL_OP operation, GraphList* Result );
|
||||
void Correction( GraphList* Result, double factor );
|
||||
void MakeRing( GraphList* Result, double factor );
|
||||
void CreateRing( GraphList *ring, double factor );
|
||||
void CreateRing_fast( GraphList *ring, double factor );
|
||||
void CreateArc( Node* center, KBoolLine* incoming, Node* end, double radius, double aber );
|
||||
void CreateArc( Node* center, Node* begin, Node* end, double radius, bool clock, double aber );
|
||||
void MakeOneDirection();
|
||||
void Make_Rounded_Shape( KBoolLink* a_link, double factor );
|
||||
bool MakeClockWise();
|
||||
bool writegraph( bool linked );
|
||||
bool writeintersections();
|
||||
void WriteKEY( Bool_Engine* GC, FILE* file = NULL );
|
||||
void WriteGraphKEY( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
//! Extracts partical polygons from the graph
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Links are sorted in XY at beginpoint. Bin and mark flag are reset.
|
||||
Next start to collect subparts from the graph, setting the links bin for all found parts.
|
||||
The parts are searched starting at a topleft corner NON set bin flag link.
|
||||
Found parts are numbered, to be easily split into to real sperate graphs by Split()
|
||||
|
||||
\param operation operation to collect for.
|
||||
\param detecthole if you want holes detected, influences also way of extraction.
|
||||
\param foundholes when holes are found this flag is set true, but only if detecthole is set true.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void Extract_Simples( BOOL_OP operation, bool detecthole, bool& foundholes );
|
||||
|
||||
//! split graph into small graph, using the numbers in links.
|
||||
void Split( GraphList* partlist );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Collect a graph by starting at argument link
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Called from Extract_Simples, and assumes sorted links with bin flag unset for non extarted piece
|
||||
|
||||
Collect graphs pieces from a total graph, by following links set to a given boolean operation.
|
||||
\param current_node start node to collect
|
||||
\param operation operation to collect for.
|
||||
\param detecthole if you want holes detected, influences also way of extraction.
|
||||
\param graphnumber number to be given to links in the extracted graph piece
|
||||
\param foundholes when holes are found this flag is set true.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
void CollectGraph( Node *current_node, BOOL_OP operation, bool detecthole, int graphnumber, bool& foundholes );
|
||||
|
||||
void CollectGraphLast( Node *current_node, BOOL_OP operation, bool detecthole, int graphnumber, bool& foundholes );
|
||||
|
||||
//! find a link not bin in the top left corner ( links should be sorted already )
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
Last found position is used to find it quickly.
|
||||
Used in ExtractSimples()
|
||||
*/
|
||||
Node* GetMostTopLeft( TDLI<KBoolLink>* _LI );
|
||||
|
||||
//! calculates crossing for all links in a graph, and add those as part of the graph.
|
||||
/*
|
||||
It is not just crossings calculation, snapping close nodes is part of it.
|
||||
This is not done at maximum stability in economic time.
|
||||
There are faster ways, but hardly ever they solve the problems, and they do not snap.
|
||||
Here it is on purpose split into separate steps, to get a better result in snapping, and
|
||||
to reach a better stability.
|
||||
|
||||
\param Marge nodes and lines closer to eachother then this, are merged.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
bool CalculateCrossings( B_INT Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//! equal nodes in position are merged into one.
|
||||
int Merge_NodeToNode( B_INT Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//! basic scan algorithm with a sweeping beam are line.
|
||||
/*!
|
||||
\param scantype a different face in the algorithm.
|
||||
\param holes to detect hole when needed.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
int ScanGraph2( SCANTYPE scantype, bool& holes );
|
||||
|
||||
//! links not used for a certain operation can be deleted, simplifying extraction
|
||||
void DeleteNonCond( BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! links not used for a certain operation can be set bin, simplifying extraction
|
||||
void HandleNonCond( BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! debug
|
||||
bool checksort();
|
||||
|
||||
//! used in correction/offset algorithm
|
||||
bool Small( B_INT howsmall );
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bool _bin;
|
||||
|
||||
DL_List<void*>* _linklist;
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
|
|||
/*! \file include/graphlst.h
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: graphlst.h,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:21 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
/* @@(#) $Source: /cvsroot/wxart2d/wxArt2D/thirdparty/kbool/include/kbool/graphlst.h,v $ $Revision: 1.3 $ $Date: 2008/06/04 21:23:21 $ */
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Program GRAPHLST.H
|
||||
Purpose Implements a list of graphs (header)
|
||||
Last Update 11-03-1996
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef GRAPHLIST_H
|
||||
#define GRAPHLIST_H
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/graph.h"
|
||||
|
||||
class Debug_driver;
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP GraphList: public DL_List<void*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
GraphList( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
GraphList( GraphList* other );
|
||||
|
||||
~GraphList();
|
||||
|
||||
void MakeOneGraph( Graph *total );
|
||||
|
||||
void Prepare( Graph *total );
|
||||
void MakeRings();
|
||||
void Correction();
|
||||
|
||||
void Simplify( double marge );
|
||||
void Smoothen( double marge );
|
||||
void Merge();
|
||||
void Boolean( BOOL_OP operation, int intersectionRunsMax );
|
||||
|
||||
void WriteGraphs();
|
||||
void WriteGraphsKEY( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
void Renumber();
|
||||
void UnMarkAll();
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,15 @@
|
|||
#ifndef __A2D_KBOOLMOD_H__
|
||||
#define __A2D_KBOOLMOD_H__
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graph.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graphlst.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/line.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/lpoint.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/node.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/record.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/scanbeam.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,107 @@
|
|||
/*! \file include/line.h
|
||||
\brief Mainy used for calculating crossings
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: line.h,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:21 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef LINE_H
|
||||
#define LINE_H
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Bool_Engine;
|
||||
|
||||
// Status of a point to a line
|
||||
enum PointStatus {LEFT_SIDE, RIGHT_SIDE, ON_AREA, IN_AREA};
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Graph;
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP KBoolLine
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* m_GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
// constructors and destructor
|
||||
KBoolLine( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
KBoolLine( KBoolLink*, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
~KBoolLine();
|
||||
|
||||
void Set( KBoolLink * );
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetLink();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Get the beginnode from a line
|
||||
Node* GetBeginNode();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Get the endnode from a line
|
||||
Node* GetEndNode();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Check if two lines intersects
|
||||
int CheckIntersect( KBoolLine*, double Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Intersects two lines
|
||||
int Intersect( KBoolLine*, double Marge );
|
||||
int Intersect_simple( KBoolLine * lijn );
|
||||
bool Intersect2( Node* crossing, KBoolLine * lijn );
|
||||
|
||||
//!For an infinite line
|
||||
PointStatus PointOnLine( Node* a_node, double& Distance, double Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//!For a non-infinite line
|
||||
PointStatus PointInLine( Node* a_node, double& Distance, double Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Caclulate Y if X is known
|
||||
B_INT Calculate_Y( B_INT X );
|
||||
B_INT Calculate_Y_from_X( B_INT X );
|
||||
void Virtual_Point( LPoint *a_point, double distance );
|
||||
|
||||
//! assignment operator
|
||||
KBoolLine& operator=( const KBoolLine& );
|
||||
|
||||
Node* OffsetContour( KBoolLine* const nextline, Node* last_ins, double factor, Graph *shape );
|
||||
Node* OffsetContour_rounded( KBoolLine* const nextline, Node* _last_ins, double factor, Graph *shape );
|
||||
bool OkeForContour( KBoolLine* const nextline, double factor, Node* LastLeft, Node* LastRight, LinkStatus& _outproduct );
|
||||
bool Create_Ring_Shape( KBoolLine* nextline, Node** _last_ins_left, Node** _last_ins_right, double factor, Graph *shape );
|
||||
void Create_Begin_Shape( KBoolLine* nextline, Node** _last_ins_left, Node** _last_ins_right, double factor, Graph *shape );
|
||||
void Create_End_Shape( KBoolLine* nextline, Node* _last_ins_left, Node* _last_ins_right, double factor, Graph *shape );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Calculate the parameters if nessecary
|
||||
void CalculateLineParameters();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Adds a crossing between the intersecting lines
|
||||
void AddLineCrossing( B_INT , B_INT , KBoolLine * );
|
||||
|
||||
void AddCrossing( Node *a_node );
|
||||
Node* AddCrossing( B_INT X, B_INT Y );
|
||||
bool ProcessCrossings( TDLI<KBoolLink>* _LI );
|
||||
|
||||
// Linecrosslist
|
||||
void SortLineCrossings();
|
||||
bool CrossListEmpty();
|
||||
DL_List<void*>* GetCrossList();
|
||||
// bool HasInCrossList(Node*);
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
//! Function needed for Intersect
|
||||
int ActionOnTable1( PointStatus, PointStatus );
|
||||
//! Function needed for Intersect
|
||||
int ActionOnTable2( PointStatus, PointStatus );
|
||||
|
||||
double m_AA;
|
||||
double m_BB;
|
||||
double m_CC;
|
||||
KBoolLink* m_link;
|
||||
bool m_valid_parameters;
|
||||
|
||||
//! List with crossings through this link
|
||||
DL_List<void*> *linecrosslist;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,230 @@
|
|||
/*! \file include/link.h
|
||||
\brief Part of a graph, connection between nodes (Header)
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda or Julian Smart
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: link.h,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:22 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef LINK_H
|
||||
#define LINK_H
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
|
||||
enum LinkStatus {IS_LEFT, IS_ON, IS_RIGHT};
|
||||
|
||||
class LPoint;
|
||||
class Node;
|
||||
class Record;
|
||||
|
||||
//! segment within a graph
|
||||
/*
|
||||
A Graph contains a list of KBoolLink, the KBoolLink or connected by Node's.
|
||||
Several KBoolLink can be connected to one Node.
|
||||
A KBoolLink has a direction defined by its begin and end node.
|
||||
Node do have a list of connected KBoolLink's.
|
||||
So one can walk trough a graph in two ways:
|
||||
1- via its KBoolLink list
|
||||
2- via the node connected to the KBoolLink's
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP KBoolLink
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
//! contructors
|
||||
KBoolLink( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
//! contructors
|
||||
KBoolLink( int graphnr, Node* begin, Node* end, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
//! contructors
|
||||
KBoolLink( Node *begin, Node *end, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
//! destructors
|
||||
~KBoolLink();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! Merges the other node with argument
|
||||
void MergeNodes( Node* const );
|
||||
|
||||
//! outproduct of two links
|
||||
LinkStatus OutProduct( KBoolLink* const two, double accur );
|
||||
|
||||
//! link three compared to this and two
|
||||
LinkStatus PointOnCorner( KBoolLink* const, KBoolLink* const );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Removes argument from the link
|
||||
void Remove( Node* );
|
||||
|
||||
//! replaces olddone in the link by newnode
|
||||
void Replace( Node* oldnode, Node* newnode );
|
||||
|
||||
//!top hole marking
|
||||
void SetTopHole( bool value );
|
||||
|
||||
//!top hole marking
|
||||
bool IsTopHole();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Marking functions
|
||||
void UnMark();
|
||||
//! Marking functions
|
||||
void Mark();
|
||||
//! Marking functions
|
||||
void SetMark( bool );
|
||||
//! Marking functions
|
||||
bool IsMarked();
|
||||
|
||||
//! holelink Marking functions
|
||||
void SetHoleLink( bool val ){ m_holelink = val;};
|
||||
|
||||
//! holelink Marking functions
|
||||
bool GetHoleLink(){ return m_holelink;};
|
||||
|
||||
//! Bin functions
|
||||
void SetNotBeenHere();
|
||||
//! Bin functions
|
||||
void SetBeenHere();
|
||||
//! Have you been here ??
|
||||
bool BeenHere();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Removes all the references to this
|
||||
void UnLink();
|
||||
|
||||
//! functions for maximum performance
|
||||
Node* GetBeginNode();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Datamember access functions
|
||||
Node* GetEndNode();
|
||||
Node* GetLowNode();
|
||||
Node* GetHighNode();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Returns a next link beginning with argument
|
||||
KBoolLink* Forth( Node* );
|
||||
|
||||
int GetGraphNum();
|
||||
bool GetInc();
|
||||
bool GetLeftA();
|
||||
bool GetLeftB();
|
||||
bool GetRightA();
|
||||
bool GetRightB();
|
||||
void GetLRO( LPoint*, int&, int&, double );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Return a node not equal to arg.
|
||||
Node* GetOther( const Node* const );
|
||||
//! Is this link unused ?
|
||||
bool IsUnused();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Used for given operation ?
|
||||
bool IsMarked( BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! return true if Left side is marked true for operation
|
||||
bool IsMarkedLeft( BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! return true if Right side is marked true for operation
|
||||
bool IsMarkedRight( BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! is this a hole link for given operation
|
||||
bool IsHole( BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! set the hole mark
|
||||
void SetHole( bool );
|
||||
|
||||
//! is the hole mark set?
|
||||
bool GetHole();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Are the nodes on about the same coordinates ?
|
||||
bool IsZero( B_INT marge );
|
||||
bool ShorterThan( B_INT marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Resets the link
|
||||
void Reset( Node* begin, Node* end, int graphnr = 0 );
|
||||
void Set( Node* begin, Node* end );
|
||||
void SetBeginNode( Node* );
|
||||
void SetEndNode( Node* );
|
||||
void SetGraphNum( int );
|
||||
void SetInc( bool );
|
||||
void SetLeftA( bool );
|
||||
void SetLeftB( bool );
|
||||
void SetRightA( bool );
|
||||
void SetRightB( bool );
|
||||
void SetGroup( GroupType );
|
||||
GroupType Group();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Flag calculation (internal only)
|
||||
void SetLineTypes();
|
||||
void Reset();
|
||||
void Reset_flags();
|
||||
|
||||
//!put in this direction
|
||||
void Redirect( Node* a_node );
|
||||
|
||||
void TakeOverOperationFlags( KBoolLink* link );
|
||||
|
||||
void SetRecordNode( DL_Node<Record*>* recordNode ) { m_record = recordNode; }
|
||||
|
||||
DL_Node<Record*>* GetRecordNode() { return m_record; }
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
//! The mainitems of a link
|
||||
Node *m_beginnode, *m_endnode;
|
||||
//! Marker for walking over the graph
|
||||
bool m_bin : 1;
|
||||
//! Is this a part of hole ?
|
||||
bool m_hole : 1;
|
||||
//! link that is toplink of hole?
|
||||
bool m_hole_top : 1;
|
||||
//! going in one more time in this graph if true else going out one time
|
||||
bool m_Inc : 1;
|
||||
//! Is left in polygongroup A
|
||||
bool m_LeftA : 1;
|
||||
//! Is right in polygon group A
|
||||
bool m_RightA : 1;
|
||||
//! Is left in polygon group B
|
||||
bool m_LeftB : 1;
|
||||
//! Is right in polygongroup B
|
||||
bool m_RightB : 1;
|
||||
//! General purose marker, internally unused
|
||||
bool m_mark : 1;
|
||||
//! link for linking holes
|
||||
bool m_holelink : 1;
|
||||
|
||||
//! Marker for Merge Left
|
||||
bool m_merge_L : 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for substract a-b Left
|
||||
bool m_a_substract_b_L: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for substract b-a Left
|
||||
bool m_b_substract_a_L: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for intersect Left
|
||||
bool m_intersect_L: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for X-OR Left
|
||||
bool m_exor_L: 1;
|
||||
|
||||
//! Marker for Merge Right
|
||||
bool m_merge_R : 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for substract a-b Right
|
||||
bool m_a_substract_b_R: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for substract b-a Right
|
||||
bool m_b_substract_a_R: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for intersect Right
|
||||
bool m_intersect_R: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for X-OR Right
|
||||
bool m_exor_R: 1;
|
||||
|
||||
//! belongs to group A or B
|
||||
GroupType m_group : 1;
|
||||
|
||||
//! belongs to this polygon part in the graph.
|
||||
int m_graphnum;
|
||||
|
||||
DL_Node<Record*>* m_record;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
|
|||
/*! \file include/lpoint.h
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: lpoint.h,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:22 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
/* @@(#) $Source: /cvsroot/wxart2d/wxArt2D/thirdparty/kbool/include/kbool/lpoint.h,v $ $Revision: 1.3 $ $Date: 2008/06/04 21:23:22 $ */
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Program LPOINT.H
|
||||
Purpose Definition of GDSII pointtype structure
|
||||
Last Update 12-12-1995
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef LPOINT_H
|
||||
#define LPOINT_H
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP LPoint
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
LPoint();
|
||||
LPoint( B_INT const , B_INT const );
|
||||
LPoint( LPoint* const );
|
||||
|
||||
void Set( const B_INT, const B_INT );
|
||||
void Set( const LPoint & );
|
||||
|
||||
LPoint GetPoint();
|
||||
B_INT GetX();
|
||||
B_INT GetY();
|
||||
void SetX( B_INT );
|
||||
void SetY( B_INT );
|
||||
bool Equal( const LPoint a_point, B_INT Marge );
|
||||
bool Equal( const B_INT, const B_INT , B_INT Marge );
|
||||
bool ShorterThan( const LPoint a_point, B_INT marge );
|
||||
bool ShorterThan( const B_INT X, const B_INT Y, B_INT );
|
||||
|
||||
LPoint &operator=( const LPoint & );
|
||||
LPoint &operator+( const LPoint & );
|
||||
LPoint &operator-( const LPoint & );
|
||||
|
||||
LPoint &operator*( int );
|
||||
LPoint &operator/( int );
|
||||
|
||||
int operator==( const LPoint & ) const;
|
||||
int operator!=( const LPoint & ) const;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
B_INT _x;
|
||||
B_INT _y;
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
|
|||
/*! \file include/node.h
|
||||
\brief Holds a GDSII node structure (Header)
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: node.h,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:22 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef NODE_H
|
||||
#define NODE_H
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/lpoint.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h" // LinkBaseIter
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
|
||||
enum NodePosition { N_LEFT, N_ON, N_RIGHT};
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Node : public LPoint
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
// friend must be deleted in the final version!
|
||||
friend class Debug_driver;
|
||||
|
||||
// constructors and destructors
|
||||
Node( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
Node( const B_INT, const B_INT, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
Node( LPoint* const a_point, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
Node( Node * const, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
Node& operator=( const Node &other_node );
|
||||
~Node();
|
||||
|
||||
//public member functions
|
||||
void AddLink( KBoolLink* );
|
||||
DL_List<void*>* GetLinklist();
|
||||
|
||||
//! check two link for its operation flags to be the same when coming from the prev link.
|
||||
bool SameSides( KBoolLink* const prev , KBoolLink* const link, BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! get the link most right or left to the current link, but with the specific operation
|
||||
/*! flags the same on the sides of the new link.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetMost( KBoolLink* const prev , LinkStatus whatside, BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! get link that is leading to a hole ( hole segment or linking segment )
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetMostHole( KBoolLink* const prev , LinkStatus whatside, BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! get link that is not vertical.
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetNotFlat();
|
||||
|
||||
//! get a link to a hole or from a hole.
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetHoleLink( KBoolLink* const prev, bool checkbin, BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
int Merge( Node* );
|
||||
void RemoveLink( KBoolLink* );
|
||||
bool Simplify( Node* First, Node* Second, B_INT Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
// memberfunctions for maximum performance
|
||||
void RoundInt( B_INT grid );
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetIncomingLink();
|
||||
|
||||
int GetNumberOfLinks();
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetNextLink();
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetOtherLink( KBoolLink* );
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetOutgoingLink();
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetPrevLink();
|
||||
|
||||
KBoolLink* Follow( KBoolLink* const prev );
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetBinHighest( bool binset );
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
DL_List<void*>* _linklist;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
|
|||
/*! \file include/record.h
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: record.h,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:22 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef RECORD_H
|
||||
#define RECORD_H
|
||||
|
||||
class Node;
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/line.h"
|
||||
|
||||
enum BEAM_TYPE { NORMAL, FLAT};
|
||||
|
||||
enum DIRECTION {GO_LEFT, GO_RIGHT};
|
||||
|
||||
//extern void DeleteRecordPool();
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Bool_Engine;
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Record
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
// void deletepool();
|
||||
|
||||
Record( KBoolLink* link, Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
|
||||
~Record();
|
||||
|
||||
// void* operator new(size_t size);
|
||||
|
||||
// void operator delete(void* recordptr);
|
||||
|
||||
void SetNewLink( KBoolLink* link );
|
||||
|
||||
void Set_Flags();
|
||||
|
||||
void Calc_Ysp( Node* low );
|
||||
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetLink();
|
||||
|
||||
KBoolLine* GetLine();
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT Ysp();
|
||||
|
||||
void SetYsp( B_INT ysp );
|
||||
|
||||
DIRECTION Direction();
|
||||
|
||||
bool Calc_Left_Right( Record* record_above_me );
|
||||
|
||||
bool Equal( Record* );
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
KBoolLine _line;
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT _ysp;
|
||||
|
||||
//! going left are right in beam
|
||||
DIRECTION _dir;
|
||||
|
||||
//! how far in group_a
|
||||
int _a;
|
||||
|
||||
//! how far in group_b
|
||||
int _b;
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
|
|||
/*! \file include/scanbeam.h
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: scanbeam.h,v 1.4 2008/09/05 19:01:14 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef SCANBEAM_H
|
||||
#define SCANBEAM_H
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "kbool/record.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
|
||||
enum SCANTYPE{NODELINK, LINKLINK, GENLR, LINKHOLES, INOUT};
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(WXART2D_USINGDLL)
|
||||
template class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP DL_Iter<Record*>;
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP ScanBeam : public DL_List<Record*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
ScanBeam( Bool_Engine* GC );
|
||||
~ScanBeam();
|
||||
void SetType( Node* low, Node* high );
|
||||
|
||||
bool FindNew( SCANTYPE scantype, TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes );
|
||||
bool RemoveOld( SCANTYPE scantype, TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes );
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
bool ProcessHoles( bool atinsert, TDLI<KBoolLink>* _LI );
|
||||
int Process_LinkToLink_Crossings(); // find crossings
|
||||
int Process_PointToLink_Crossings();
|
||||
int Process_LinkToLink_Flat( KBoolLine* flatline );
|
||||
void SortTheBeam( bool backangle );
|
||||
bool checksort();
|
||||
bool writebeam();
|
||||
void Calc_Ysp();
|
||||
//int FindCloseLinksAndCross(TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I,Node* _lowf);
|
||||
void Generate_INOUT( int graphnumber );
|
||||
|
||||
Node* _low;
|
||||
DL_Iter<Record*> _BI;
|
||||
int lastinserted;
|
||||
BEAM_TYPE _type;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,54 @@
|
|||
/*! \file kbool/include/kbool/statusb.h
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: statusb.h,v 1.2 2006/12/15 21:00:06 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
/* @@(#) $Source: /cvsroot/wxart2d/wxArt2D/thirdparty/kbool/include/kbool/statusb.h,v $ $Revision: 1.2 $ $Date: 2006/12/15 21:00:06 $ */
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Program STATUSB.H
|
||||
Purpose Controls the statusbar of the application (header)
|
||||
This statusbar is a typical Windows statusbar
|
||||
For porting to another platform there must be a StatusBar class
|
||||
derived from this.
|
||||
User interface element (See documentation for more details
|
||||
about the functions needed in this class)
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef STATUSB_H
|
||||
#define STATUSB_H
|
||||
#include <time.h>
|
||||
|
||||
// abstract base class for own statusbar inherite from it
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP StatusBar
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
// constructor & destructor
|
||||
StatusBar(){};
|
||||
~StatusBar(){};
|
||||
|
||||
virtual void SetXY( double = 0.0, double = 0.0 ) = 0;
|
||||
virtual void ResetCoord() = 0;
|
||||
virtual void SetFile( char* = 0 ) = 0;
|
||||
virtual void SetProcess( char* = 0 ) = 0;
|
||||
virtual void SetTime( time_t seconds = 0 ) = 0;
|
||||
virtual void SetRecording( int status = 0 ) = 0;
|
||||
virtual void SetZoom( float factor = 1 ) = 0;
|
||||
virtual void Reset() = 0;
|
||||
void StartDTimer();
|
||||
void EndDTimer();
|
||||
int GetDTimerOn();
|
||||
time_t GetDTimer();
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
int timer;
|
||||
time_t oldtime;
|
||||
time_t curtime;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -5,5 +5,5 @@
|
|||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: valuesvc.h,v 1.1 2005/05/24 19:13:37 titato Exp $
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: valuesvc.h,v 1.1 2006/11/04 21:49:01 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
|
@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
|
|||
#ifndef __A2D_KBOOLMOD_H__
|
||||
#define __A2D_KBOOLMOD_H__
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/graph.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/graphlst.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/line.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/link.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/lpoint.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/node.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/record.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/scanbeam.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file ../include/../line.h
|
||||
\brief Mainy used for calculating crossings
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: line.h,v 1.2 2005/06/12 00:03:11 kbluck Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef LINE_H
|
||||
#define LINE_H
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(NO_GCC_PRAGMA)
|
||||
#pragma interface
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/link.h"
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Bool_Engine;
|
||||
|
||||
// Status of a point to a line
|
||||
enum PointStatus {LEFT_SIDE, RIGHT_SIDE, ON_AREA, IN_AREA};
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Graph;
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP KBoolLine
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* m_GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
// constructors and destructor
|
||||
KBoolLine(Bool_Engine* GC);
|
||||
KBoolLine(KBoolLink*,Bool_Engine* GC);
|
||||
~KBoolLine();
|
||||
|
||||
void Set(KBoolLink *);
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetLink();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Get the beginnode from a line
|
||||
Node* GetBeginNode();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Get the endnode from a line
|
||||
Node* GetEndNode();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Check if two lines intersects
|
||||
int CheckIntersect(KBoolLine*, double Marge);
|
||||
|
||||
//! Intersects two lines
|
||||
int Intersect(KBoolLine*, double Marge);
|
||||
int Intersect_simple(KBoolLine * lijn);
|
||||
bool Intersect2(Node* crossing,KBoolLine * lijn);
|
||||
|
||||
//!For an infinite line
|
||||
PointStatus PointOnLine(Node* a_node, double& Distance, double Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//!For a non-infinite line
|
||||
PointStatus PointInLine(Node* a_node, double& Distance, double Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Caclulate Y if X is known
|
||||
B_INT Calculate_Y(B_INT X);
|
||||
B_INT Calculate_Y_from_X(B_INT X);
|
||||
void Virtual_Point( LPoint *a_point, double distance);
|
||||
|
||||
//! assignment operator
|
||||
KBoolLine& operator=(const KBoolLine&);
|
||||
|
||||
Node* OffsetContour(KBoolLine* const nextline,Node* last_ins, double factor,Graph *shape);
|
||||
Node* OffsetContour_rounded(KBoolLine* const nextline,Node* _last_ins, double factor,Graph *shape);
|
||||
bool OkeForContour(KBoolLine* const nextline,double factor,Node* LastLeft,Node* LastRight, LinkStatus& _outproduct);
|
||||
bool Create_Ring_Shape(KBoolLine* nextline,Node** _last_ins_left,Node** _last_ins_right,double factor,Graph *shape);
|
||||
void Create_Begin_Shape(KBoolLine* nextline,Node** _last_ins_left,Node** _last_ins_right,double factor,Graph *shape);
|
||||
void Create_End_Shape(KBoolLine* nextline,Node* _last_ins_left,Node* _last_ins_right,double factor,Graph *shape);
|
||||
|
||||
//! Calculate the parameters if nessecary
|
||||
void CalculateLineParameters();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Adds a crossing between the intersecting lines
|
||||
void AddLineCrossing(B_INT , B_INT , KBoolLine *);
|
||||
|
||||
void AddCrossing(Node *a_node);
|
||||
Node* AddCrossing(B_INT X, B_INT Y);
|
||||
bool ProcessCrossings(TDLI<KBoolLink>* _LI);
|
||||
|
||||
// Linecrosslist
|
||||
void SortLineCrossings();
|
||||
bool CrossListEmpty();
|
||||
DL_List<void*>* GetCrossList();
|
||||
// bool HasInCrossList(Node*);
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
//! Function needed for Intersect
|
||||
int ActionOnTable1(PointStatus,PointStatus);
|
||||
//! Function needed for Intersect
|
||||
int ActionOnTable2(PointStatus,PointStatus);
|
||||
|
||||
double m_AA;
|
||||
double m_BB;
|
||||
double m_CC;
|
||||
KBoolLink* m_link;
|
||||
bool m_valid_parameters;
|
||||
|
||||
//! List with crossings through this link
|
||||
DL_List<void*> *linecrosslist;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,234 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file kbool/include/kbool/link.h
|
||||
\brief Part of a graph, connection between nodes (Header)
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda or Julian Smart
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: link.h,v 1.1 2005/05/24 19:13:37 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef LINK_H
|
||||
#define LINK_H
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(NO_GCC_PRAGMA)
|
||||
#pragma interface
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
|
||||
enum LinkStatus {IS_LEFT,IS_ON,IS_RIGHT};
|
||||
|
||||
class LPoint;
|
||||
class Node;
|
||||
class Record;
|
||||
|
||||
//! segment within a graph
|
||||
/*
|
||||
A Graph contains a list of KBoolLink, the KBoolLink or connected by Node's.
|
||||
Several KBoolLink can be connected to one Node.
|
||||
A KBoolLink has a direction defined by its begin and end node.
|
||||
Node do have a list of connected KBoolLink's.
|
||||
So one can walk trough a graph in two ways:
|
||||
1- via its KBoolLink list
|
||||
2- via the node connected to the KBoolLink's
|
||||
*/
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP KBoolLink
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
|
||||
//! contructors
|
||||
KBoolLink(Bool_Engine* GC);
|
||||
|
||||
//! contructors
|
||||
KBoolLink(int graphnr, Node* begin, Node* end, Bool_Engine* GC);
|
||||
|
||||
//! contructors
|
||||
KBoolLink(Node *begin, Node *end, Bool_Engine* GC);
|
||||
|
||||
//! destructors
|
||||
~KBoolLink();
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//! Merges the other node with argument
|
||||
void MergeNodes(Node* const);
|
||||
|
||||
//! outproduct of two links
|
||||
LinkStatus OutProduct(KBoolLink* const two,double accur);
|
||||
|
||||
//! link three compared to this and two
|
||||
LinkStatus PointOnCorner(KBoolLink* const, KBoolLink* const);
|
||||
|
||||
//! Removes argument from the link
|
||||
void Remove(Node*);
|
||||
|
||||
//! replaces olddone in the link by newnode
|
||||
void Replace(Node* oldnode, Node* newnode);
|
||||
|
||||
//!top hole marking
|
||||
void SetTopHole(bool value);
|
||||
|
||||
//!top hole marking
|
||||
bool IsTopHole();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Marking functions
|
||||
void UnMark();
|
||||
//! Marking functions
|
||||
void Mark();
|
||||
//! Marking functions
|
||||
void SetMark(bool);
|
||||
//! Marking functions
|
||||
bool IsMarked();
|
||||
|
||||
//! holelink Marking functions
|
||||
void SetHoleLink(bool val){ m_holelink = val;};
|
||||
|
||||
//! holelink Marking functions
|
||||
bool GetHoleLink(){ return m_holelink;};
|
||||
|
||||
//! Bin functions
|
||||
void SetNotBeenHere();
|
||||
//! Bin functions
|
||||
void SetBeenHere();
|
||||
//! Have you been here ??
|
||||
bool BeenHere();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Removes all the references to this
|
||||
void UnLink();
|
||||
|
||||
//! functions for maximum performance
|
||||
Node* GetBeginNode();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Datamember access functions
|
||||
Node* GetEndNode();
|
||||
Node* GetLowNode();
|
||||
Node* GetHighNode();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Returns a next link beginning with argument
|
||||
KBoolLink* Forth(Node*);
|
||||
|
||||
int GetGraphNum();
|
||||
bool GetInc();
|
||||
bool GetLeftA();
|
||||
bool GetLeftB();
|
||||
bool GetRightA();
|
||||
bool GetRightB();
|
||||
void GetLRO(LPoint*, int&, int&, double);
|
||||
|
||||
//! Return a node not equal to arg.
|
||||
Node* GetOther(const Node* const);
|
||||
//! Is this link unused ?
|
||||
bool IsUnused();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Used for given operation ?
|
||||
bool IsMarked(BOOL_OP operation);
|
||||
|
||||
//! return true if Left side is marked true for operation
|
||||
bool IsMarkedLeft(BOOL_OP operation);
|
||||
|
||||
//! return true if Right side is marked true for operation
|
||||
bool IsMarkedRight(BOOL_OP operation);
|
||||
|
||||
//! is this a hole link for given operation
|
||||
bool IsHole(BOOL_OP operation);
|
||||
|
||||
//! set the hole mark
|
||||
void SetHole(bool);
|
||||
|
||||
//! is the hole mark set?
|
||||
bool GetHole();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Are the nodes on about the same coordinates ?
|
||||
bool IsZero(B_INT marge );
|
||||
bool ShorterThan(B_INT marge );
|
||||
|
||||
//! Resets the link
|
||||
void Reset(Node* begin, Node* end, int graphnr = 0);
|
||||
void Set(Node* begin, Node* end);
|
||||
void SetBeginNode(Node*);
|
||||
void SetEndNode(Node*);
|
||||
void SetGraphNum(int);
|
||||
void SetInc(bool);
|
||||
void SetLeftA(bool);
|
||||
void SetLeftB(bool);
|
||||
void SetRightA(bool);
|
||||
void SetRightB(bool);
|
||||
void SetGroup(GroupType);
|
||||
GroupType Group();
|
||||
|
||||
//! Flag calculation (internal only)
|
||||
void SetLineTypes();
|
||||
void Reset();
|
||||
void Reset_flags();
|
||||
|
||||
//!put in this direction
|
||||
void Redirect(Node* a_node);
|
||||
|
||||
void TakeOverOperationFlags( KBoolLink* link );
|
||||
|
||||
void SetRecordNode( DL_Node<Record*>* recordNode ) { m_record = recordNode; }
|
||||
|
||||
DL_Node<Record*>* GetRecordNode() { return m_record; }
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
|
||||
//! The mainitems of a link
|
||||
Node *m_beginnode, *m_endnode;
|
||||
//! Marker for walking over the graph
|
||||
bool m_bin : 1;
|
||||
//! Is this a part of hole ?
|
||||
bool m_hole : 1;
|
||||
//! link that is toplink of hole?
|
||||
bool m_hole_top : 1;
|
||||
//! going in one more time in this graph if true else going out one time
|
||||
bool m_Inc : 1;
|
||||
//! Is left in polygongroup A
|
||||
bool m_LeftA : 1;
|
||||
//! Is right in polygon group A
|
||||
bool m_RightA : 1;
|
||||
//! Is left in polygon group B
|
||||
bool m_LeftB : 1;
|
||||
//! Is right in polygongroup B
|
||||
bool m_RightB : 1;
|
||||
//! General purose marker, internally unused
|
||||
bool m_mark : 1;
|
||||
//! link for linking holes
|
||||
bool m_holelink : 1;
|
||||
|
||||
//! Marker for Merge Left
|
||||
bool m_merge_L : 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for substract a-b Left
|
||||
bool m_a_substract_b_L: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for substract b-a Left
|
||||
bool m_b_substract_a_L: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for intersect Left
|
||||
bool m_intersect_L: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for X-OR Left
|
||||
bool m_exor_L: 1;
|
||||
|
||||
//! Marker for Merge Right
|
||||
bool m_merge_R : 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for substract a-b Right
|
||||
bool m_a_substract_b_R: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for substract b-a Right
|
||||
bool m_b_substract_a_R: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for intersect Right
|
||||
bool m_intersect_R: 1;
|
||||
//! Marker for X-OR Right
|
||||
bool m_exor_R: 1;
|
||||
|
||||
//! belongs to group A or B
|
||||
GroupType m_group : 1;
|
||||
|
||||
//! belongs to this polygon part in the graph.
|
||||
int m_graphnum;
|
||||
|
||||
DL_Node<Record*>* m_record;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
|
@ -1,64 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file ../include/../lpoint.h
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: lpoint.h,v 1.1 2005/05/24 19:13:37 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
/* @@(#) $Source: /cvsroot/wxart2d/wxArt2D/modules/../include/lpoint.h,v $ $Revision: 1.1 $ $Date: 2005/05/24 19:13:37 $ */
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
Program LPOINT.H
|
||||
Purpose Definition of GDSII pointtype structure
|
||||
Last Update 12-12-1995
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef LPOINT_H
|
||||
#define LPOINT_H
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(NO_GCC_PRAGMA)
|
||||
#pragma interface
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP LPoint
|
||||
{
|
||||
public:
|
||||
LPoint();
|
||||
LPoint(B_INT const ,B_INT const);
|
||||
LPoint(LPoint* const);
|
||||
|
||||
void Set(const B_INT,const B_INT);
|
||||
void Set(const LPoint &);
|
||||
|
||||
LPoint GetPoint();
|
||||
B_INT GetX();
|
||||
B_INT GetY();
|
||||
void SetX(B_INT);
|
||||
void SetY(B_INT);
|
||||
bool Equal(const LPoint a_point, B_INT Marge );
|
||||
bool Equal(const B_INT,const B_INT , B_INT Marge);
|
||||
bool ShorterThan(const LPoint a_point, B_INT marge);
|
||||
bool ShorterThan(const B_INT X, const B_INT Y, B_INT);
|
||||
|
||||
LPoint &operator=(const LPoint &);
|
||||
LPoint &operator+(const LPoint &);
|
||||
LPoint &operator-(const LPoint &);
|
||||
|
||||
LPoint &operator*(int);
|
||||
LPoint &operator/(int);
|
||||
|
||||
int operator==(const LPoint &) const;
|
||||
int operator!=(const LPoint &) const;
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
B_INT _x;
|
||||
B_INT _y;
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file ../include/../node.h
|
||||
\brief Holds a GDSII node structure (Header)
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: node.h,v 1.1 2005/05/24 19:13:37 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef NODE_H
|
||||
#define NODE_H
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(NO_GCC_PRAGMA)
|
||||
#pragma interface
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/lpoint.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/link.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/_lnk_itr.h" // LinkBaseIter
|
||||
|
||||
enum NodePosition { N_LEFT, N_ON, N_RIGHT};
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Node : public LPoint
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
// friend must be deleted in the final version!
|
||||
friend class Debug_driver;
|
||||
|
||||
// constructors and destructors
|
||||
Node(Bool_Engine* GC);
|
||||
|
||||
Node(const B_INT, const B_INT, Bool_Engine* GC);
|
||||
|
||||
Node(LPoint* const a_point, Bool_Engine* GC);
|
||||
Node(Node * const, Bool_Engine* GC);
|
||||
Node& operator=(const Node &other_node);
|
||||
~Node();
|
||||
|
||||
//public member functions
|
||||
void AddLink(KBoolLink*);
|
||||
DL_List<void*>* GetLinklist();
|
||||
|
||||
//! check two link for its operation flags to be the same when coming from the prev link.
|
||||
bool SameSides( KBoolLink* const prev , KBoolLink* const link, BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! get the link most right or left to the current link, but with the specific operation
|
||||
/*! flags the same on the sides of the new link.
|
||||
*/
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetMost( KBoolLink* const prev ,LinkStatus whatside, BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! get link that is leading to a hole ( hole segment or linking segment )
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetMostHole( KBoolLink* const prev ,LinkStatus whatside, BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
//! get link that is not vertical.
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetNotFlat();
|
||||
|
||||
//! get a link to a hole or from a hole.
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetHoleLink( KBoolLink* const prev, bool checkbin, BOOL_OP operation );
|
||||
|
||||
int Merge(Node*);
|
||||
void RemoveLink(KBoolLink*);
|
||||
bool Simplify(Node* First, Node* Second, B_INT Marge );
|
||||
|
||||
// memberfunctions for maximum performance
|
||||
void RoundInt(B_INT grid);
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetIncomingLink();
|
||||
|
||||
int GetNumberOfLinks();
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetNextLink();
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetOtherLink(KBoolLink*);
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetOutgoingLink();
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetPrevLink();
|
||||
|
||||
KBoolLink* Follow(KBoolLink* const prev );
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetBinHighest(bool binset);
|
||||
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
DL_List<void*>* _linklist;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,82 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file ../include/../record.h
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: record.h,v 1.1 2005/05/24 19:13:37 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef RECORD_H
|
||||
#define RECORD_H
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(NO_GCC_PRAGMA)
|
||||
#pragma interface
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
class Node;
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/link.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/line.h"
|
||||
|
||||
enum BEAM_TYPE { NORMAL,FLAT};
|
||||
|
||||
enum DIRECTION {GO_LEFT,GO_RIGHT};
|
||||
|
||||
//extern void DeleteRecordPool();
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Bool_Engine;
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP Record
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
public:
|
||||
// void deletepool();
|
||||
|
||||
Record(KBoolLink* link,Bool_Engine* GC);
|
||||
|
||||
~Record();
|
||||
|
||||
// void* operator new(size_t size);
|
||||
|
||||
// void operator delete(void* recordptr);
|
||||
|
||||
void SetNewLink(KBoolLink* link);
|
||||
|
||||
void Set_Flags();
|
||||
|
||||
void Calc_Ysp(Node* low);
|
||||
|
||||
KBoolLink* GetLink();
|
||||
|
||||
KBoolLine* GetLine();
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT Ysp();
|
||||
|
||||
void SetYsp(B_INT ysp);
|
||||
|
||||
DIRECTION Direction();
|
||||
|
||||
bool Calc_Left_Right(Record* record_above_me);
|
||||
|
||||
bool Equal(Record*);
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
KBoolLine _line;
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT _ysp;
|
||||
|
||||
//! going left are right in beam
|
||||
DIRECTION _dir;
|
||||
|
||||
//! how far in group_a
|
||||
int _a;
|
||||
|
||||
//! how far in group_b
|
||||
int _b;
|
||||
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
|
|||
/*! \file ../include/../scanbeam.h
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: scanbeam.h,v 1.2 2005/06/11 19:25:12 frm Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifndef SCANBEAM_H
|
||||
#define SCANBEAM_H
|
||||
|
||||
#if defined(__GNUG__) && !defined(NO_GCC_PRAGMA)
|
||||
#pragma interface
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/record.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/link.h"
|
||||
|
||||
enum SCANTYPE{NODELINK,LINKLINK,GENLR,LINKHOLES,INOUT};
|
||||
|
||||
#if 0 // Kicad does dot use wxWidgets lib when building the kbool library
|
||||
// but uses wxWidgets. So WXUSINGDLL could be defined in makefiles
|
||||
// but must not be used when building kbool
|
||||
#if defined(WXUSINGDLL)
|
||||
template class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP DL_Iter<Record*>;
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
class A2DKBOOLDLLEXP ScanBeam : public DL_List<Record*>
|
||||
{
|
||||
protected:
|
||||
Bool_Engine* _GC;
|
||||
|
||||
public:
|
||||
ScanBeam(Bool_Engine* GC);
|
||||
~ScanBeam();
|
||||
void SetType(Node* low,Node* high);
|
||||
|
||||
bool FindNew(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes );
|
||||
bool RemoveOld(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes );
|
||||
|
||||
private:
|
||||
|
||||
bool ProcessHoles(bool atinsert,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _LI);
|
||||
int Process_LinkToLink_Crossings(); // find crossings
|
||||
int Process_PointToLink_Crossings();
|
||||
int Process_LinkToLink_Flat(KBoolLine* flatline);
|
||||
void SortTheBeam( bool backangle );
|
||||
bool checksort();
|
||||
bool writebeam();
|
||||
void Calc_Ysp();
|
||||
//int FindCloseLinksAndCross(TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I,Node* _lowf);
|
||||
void Generate_INOUT(int graphnumber);
|
||||
|
||||
Node* _low;
|
||||
DL_Iter<Record*> _BI;
|
||||
int lastinserted;
|
||||
BEAM_TYPE _type;
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
#endif
|
|
@ -1,10 +0,0 @@
|
|||
Boolean: GDSII viewer/editor + (boolean) operations on sets of 2d polygons.
|
||||
Boolean Web Site:
|
||||
http://boolean.klaasholwerda.nl/bool.html
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright section form the site:
|
||||
The code is written by Klaas Holwerda, it is free to use for non commercial open source projects licensed as GPL.
|
||||
|
||||
Note:
|
||||
License info in kbool files:
|
||||
files are under wxWidget license
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
|
|||
Boolean: GDSII viewer/editor + (boolean) operations on sets of 2d polygons.
|
||||
Boolean Web Site:
|
||||
http://boolean.klaasholwerda.nl/bool.html
|
||||
|
||||
kbool is also used in wxArt2D
|
||||
see www.wxart2d.org
|
||||
the last version of kbool can be found on this site.
|
|
@ -0,0 +1,684 @@
|
|||
The kbool library is dual licensed.
|
||||
The GPL applies for open source, but for commercial use it is proprietary.
|
||||
Contact copyright holder for more information on other licensing schemes.
|
||||
|
||||
Software library is provided "AS IS" without warranty of any kind, conform point 16 and 17 down here.
|
||||
|
||||
Next a copy of the GPL license text.
|
||||
|
||||
==========================================================================
|
||||
|
||||
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
|
||||
Version 3, 29 June 2007
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
|
||||
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
|
||||
of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
|
||||
|
||||
Preamble
|
||||
|
||||
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for
|
||||
software and other kinds of works.
|
||||
|
||||
The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed
|
||||
to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By contrast,
|
||||
the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to
|
||||
share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free
|
||||
software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foundation, use the
|
||||
GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to
|
||||
any other work released this way by its authors. You can apply it to
|
||||
your programs, too.
|
||||
|
||||
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
|
||||
price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
|
||||
have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
|
||||
them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
|
||||
want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
|
||||
free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
|
||||
|
||||
To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you
|
||||
these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have
|
||||
certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if
|
||||
you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
|
||||
|
||||
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
|
||||
gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
|
||||
freedoms that you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive
|
||||
or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they
|
||||
know their rights.
|
||||
|
||||
Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:
|
||||
(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
|
||||
giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
|
||||
|
||||
For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains
|
||||
that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users' and
|
||||
authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as
|
||||
changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to
|
||||
authors of previous versions.
|
||||
|
||||
Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run
|
||||
modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer
|
||||
can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of
|
||||
protecting users' freedom to change the software. The systematic
|
||||
pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to
|
||||
use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we
|
||||
have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those
|
||||
products. If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we
|
||||
stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions
|
||||
of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.
|
||||
|
||||
Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents.
|
||||
States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of
|
||||
software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to
|
||||
avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could
|
||||
make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that
|
||||
patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
|
||||
|
||||
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
|
||||
modification follow.
|
||||
|
||||
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
|
||||
|
||||
0. Definitions.
|
||||
|
||||
"This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
|
||||
|
||||
"Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of
|
||||
works, such as semiconductor masks.
|
||||
|
||||
"The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this
|
||||
License. Each licensee is addressed as "you". "Licensees" and
|
||||
"recipients" may be individuals or organizations.
|
||||
|
||||
To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work
|
||||
in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an
|
||||
exact copy. The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the
|
||||
earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work.
|
||||
|
||||
A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based
|
||||
on the Program.
|
||||
|
||||
To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without
|
||||
permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
|
||||
infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a
|
||||
computer or modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying,
|
||||
distribution (with or without modification), making available to the
|
||||
public, and in some countries other activities as well.
|
||||
|
||||
To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other
|
||||
parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through
|
||||
a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
|
||||
|
||||
An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices"
|
||||
to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible
|
||||
feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2)
|
||||
tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the
|
||||
extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the
|
||||
work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If
|
||||
the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a
|
||||
menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
|
||||
|
||||
1. Source Code.
|
||||
|
||||
The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work
|
||||
for making modifications to it. "Object code" means any non-source
|
||||
form of a work.
|
||||
|
||||
A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official
|
||||
standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of
|
||||
interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that
|
||||
is widely used among developers working in that language.
|
||||
|
||||
The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other
|
||||
than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of
|
||||
packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major
|
||||
Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that
|
||||
Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an
|
||||
implementation is available to the public in source code form. A
|
||||
"Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component
|
||||
(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system
|
||||
(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to
|
||||
produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
|
||||
|
||||
The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all
|
||||
the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable
|
||||
work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to
|
||||
control those activities. However, it does not include the work's
|
||||
System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free
|
||||
programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but
|
||||
which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source
|
||||
includes interface definition files associated with source files for
|
||||
the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically
|
||||
linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require,
|
||||
such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those
|
||||
subprograms and other parts of the work.
|
||||
|
||||
The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users
|
||||
can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding
|
||||
Source.
|
||||
|
||||
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that
|
||||
same work.
|
||||
|
||||
2. Basic Permissions.
|
||||
|
||||
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of
|
||||
copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
|
||||
conditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited
|
||||
permission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a
|
||||
covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its
|
||||
content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your
|
||||
rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
|
||||
|
||||
You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not
|
||||
convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains
|
||||
in force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose
|
||||
of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you
|
||||
with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with
|
||||
the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do
|
||||
not control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works
|
||||
for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction
|
||||
and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of
|
||||
your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
|
||||
|
||||
Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under
|
||||
the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10
|
||||
makes it unnecessary.
|
||||
|
||||
3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
|
||||
|
||||
No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological
|
||||
measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article
|
||||
11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or
|
||||
similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such
|
||||
measures.
|
||||
|
||||
When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid
|
||||
circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention
|
||||
is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to
|
||||
the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or
|
||||
modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's
|
||||
users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of
|
||||
technological measures.
|
||||
|
||||
4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
|
||||
|
||||
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you
|
||||
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
|
||||
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice;
|
||||
keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
|
||||
non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code;
|
||||
keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all
|
||||
recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
|
||||
|
||||
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,
|
||||
and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
|
||||
|
||||
5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
|
||||
|
||||
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to
|
||||
produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the
|
||||
terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
|
||||
|
||||
a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified
|
||||
it, and giving a relevant date.
|
||||
|
||||
b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is
|
||||
released under this License and any conditions added under section
|
||||
7. This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to
|
||||
"keep intact all notices".
|
||||
|
||||
c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this
|
||||
License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy. This
|
||||
License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7
|
||||
additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts,
|
||||
regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives no
|
||||
permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not
|
||||
invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
|
||||
|
||||
d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display
|
||||
Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive
|
||||
interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your
|
||||
work need not make them do so.
|
||||
|
||||
A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent
|
||||
works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work,
|
||||
and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program,
|
||||
in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an
|
||||
"aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not
|
||||
used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users
|
||||
beyond what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work
|
||||
in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other
|
||||
parts of the aggregate.
|
||||
|
||||
6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
|
||||
|
||||
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms
|
||||
of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
|
||||
machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License,
|
||||
in one of these ways:
|
||||
|
||||
a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
|
||||
(including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the
|
||||
Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium
|
||||
customarily used for software interchange.
|
||||
|
||||
b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
|
||||
(including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a
|
||||
written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as
|
||||
long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product
|
||||
model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a
|
||||
copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the
|
||||
product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical
|
||||
medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no
|
||||
more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this
|
||||
conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the
|
||||
Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
|
||||
|
||||
c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the
|
||||
written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This
|
||||
alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and
|
||||
only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord
|
||||
with subsection 6b.
|
||||
|
||||
d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated
|
||||
place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the
|
||||
Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no
|
||||
further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the
|
||||
Corresponding Source along with the object code. If the place to
|
||||
copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source
|
||||
may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party)
|
||||
that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain
|
||||
clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the
|
||||
Corresponding Source. Regardless of what server hosts the
|
||||
Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is
|
||||
available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
|
||||
|
||||
e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided
|
||||
you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding
|
||||
Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no
|
||||
charge under subsection 6d.
|
||||
|
||||
A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded
|
||||
from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be
|
||||
included in conveying the object code work.
|
||||
|
||||
A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any
|
||||
tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family,
|
||||
or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation
|
||||
into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer product,
|
||||
doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a particular
|
||||
product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a
|
||||
typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status
|
||||
of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user
|
||||
actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A product
|
||||
is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial
|
||||
commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent
|
||||
the only significant mode of use of the product.
|
||||
|
||||
"Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods,
|
||||
procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install
|
||||
and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from
|
||||
a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information must
|
||||
suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object
|
||||
code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because
|
||||
modification has been made.
|
||||
|
||||
If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or
|
||||
specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as
|
||||
part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the
|
||||
User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a
|
||||
fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the
|
||||
Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied
|
||||
by the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply
|
||||
if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install
|
||||
modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has
|
||||
been installed in ROM).
|
||||
|
||||
The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a
|
||||
requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates
|
||||
for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for
|
||||
the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. Access to a
|
||||
network may be denied when the modification itself materially and
|
||||
adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and
|
||||
protocols for communication across the network.
|
||||
|
||||
Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided,
|
||||
in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly
|
||||
documented (and with an implementation available to the public in
|
||||
source code form), and must require no special password or key for
|
||||
unpacking, reading or copying.
|
||||
|
||||
7. Additional Terms.
|
||||
|
||||
"Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this
|
||||
License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions.
|
||||
Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall
|
||||
be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent
|
||||
that they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions
|
||||
apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately
|
||||
under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by
|
||||
this License without regard to the additional permissions.
|
||||
|
||||
When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option
|
||||
remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of
|
||||
it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own
|
||||
removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place
|
||||
additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work,
|
||||
for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
|
||||
|
||||
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you
|
||||
add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of
|
||||
that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
|
||||
|
||||
a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the
|
||||
terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
|
||||
|
||||
b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or
|
||||
author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal
|
||||
Notices displayed by works containing it; or
|
||||
|
||||
c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or
|
||||
requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in
|
||||
reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
|
||||
|
||||
d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or
|
||||
authors of the material; or
|
||||
|
||||
e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some
|
||||
trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
|
||||
|
||||
f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that
|
||||
material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of
|
||||
it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for
|
||||
any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on
|
||||
those licensors and authors.
|
||||
|
||||
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further
|
||||
restrictions" within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you
|
||||
received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is
|
||||
governed by this License along with a term that is a further
|
||||
restriction, you may remove that term. If a license document contains
|
||||
a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this
|
||||
License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms
|
||||
of that license document, provided that the further restriction does
|
||||
not survive such relicensing or conveying.
|
||||
|
||||
If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you
|
||||
must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
|
||||
additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating
|
||||
where to find the applicable terms.
|
||||
|
||||
Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the
|
||||
form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions;
|
||||
the above requirements apply either way.
|
||||
|
||||
8. Termination.
|
||||
|
||||
You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly
|
||||
provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or
|
||||
modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under
|
||||
this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third
|
||||
paragraph of section 11).
|
||||
|
||||
However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
|
||||
license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
|
||||
provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
|
||||
finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright
|
||||
holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means
|
||||
prior to 60 days after the cessation.
|
||||
|
||||
Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
|
||||
reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
|
||||
violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
|
||||
received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that
|
||||
copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
|
||||
your receipt of the notice.
|
||||
|
||||
Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
|
||||
licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
|
||||
this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
|
||||
reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same
|
||||
material under section 10.
|
||||
|
||||
9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
|
||||
|
||||
You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or
|
||||
run a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work
|
||||
occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission
|
||||
to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However,
|
||||
nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or
|
||||
modify any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do
|
||||
not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a
|
||||
covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
|
||||
|
||||
10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
|
||||
|
||||
Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically
|
||||
receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
|
||||
propagate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible
|
||||
for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
|
||||
|
||||
An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an
|
||||
organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an
|
||||
organization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered
|
||||
work results from an entity transaction, each party to that
|
||||
transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever
|
||||
licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could
|
||||
give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the
|
||||
Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if
|
||||
the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
|
||||
|
||||
You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the
|
||||
rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may
|
||||
not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of
|
||||
rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation
|
||||
(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that
|
||||
any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for
|
||||
sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
|
||||
|
||||
11. Patents.
|
||||
|
||||
A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this
|
||||
License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The
|
||||
work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version".
|
||||
|
||||
A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims
|
||||
owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or
|
||||
hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted
|
||||
by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version,
|
||||
but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a
|
||||
consequence of further modification of the contributor version. For
|
||||
purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant
|
||||
patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of
|
||||
this License.
|
||||
|
||||
Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free
|
||||
patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to
|
||||
make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and
|
||||
propagate the contents of its contributor version.
|
||||
|
||||
In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express
|
||||
agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent
|
||||
(such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to
|
||||
sue for patent infringement). To "grant" such a patent license to a
|
||||
party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a
|
||||
patent against the party.
|
||||
|
||||
If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license,
|
||||
and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone
|
||||
to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a
|
||||
publicly available network server or other readily accessible means,
|
||||
then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so
|
||||
available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the
|
||||
patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner
|
||||
consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent
|
||||
license to downstream recipients. "Knowingly relying" means you have
|
||||
actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the
|
||||
covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work
|
||||
in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that
|
||||
country that you have reason to believe are valid.
|
||||
|
||||
If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or
|
||||
arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a
|
||||
covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties
|
||||
receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify
|
||||
or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license
|
||||
you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered
|
||||
work and works based on it.
|
||||
|
||||
A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within
|
||||
the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
|
||||
conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are
|
||||
specifically granted under this License. You may not convey a covered
|
||||
work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is
|
||||
in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment
|
||||
to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying
|
||||
the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the
|
||||
parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory
|
||||
patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work
|
||||
conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily
|
||||
for and in connection with specific products or compilations that
|
||||
contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement,
|
||||
or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
|
||||
|
||||
Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting
|
||||
any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
|
||||
otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
|
||||
|
||||
12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.
|
||||
|
||||
If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
|
||||
otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
|
||||
excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot convey a
|
||||
covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
|
||||
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
|
||||
not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you
|
||||
to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey
|
||||
the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this
|
||||
License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
|
||||
|
||||
13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
|
||||
|
||||
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have
|
||||
permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed
|
||||
under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single
|
||||
combined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this
|
||||
License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work,
|
||||
but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License,
|
||||
section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the
|
||||
combination as such.
|
||||
|
||||
14. Revised Versions of this License.
|
||||
|
||||
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of
|
||||
the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will
|
||||
be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
|
||||
address new problems or concerns.
|
||||
|
||||
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the
|
||||
Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General
|
||||
Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the
|
||||
option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered
|
||||
version or of any later version published by the Free Software
|
||||
Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of the
|
||||
GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published
|
||||
by the Free Software Foundation.
|
||||
|
||||
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future
|
||||
versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's
|
||||
public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you
|
||||
to choose that version for the Program.
|
||||
|
||||
Later license versions may give you additional or different
|
||||
permissions. However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
|
||||
author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a
|
||||
later version.
|
||||
|
||||
15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
|
||||
|
||||
THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
|
||||
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
|
||||
HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
|
||||
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
|
||||
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
|
||||
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM
|
||||
IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
|
||||
ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
|
||||
|
||||
16. Limitation of Liability.
|
||||
|
||||
IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
|
||||
WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS
|
||||
THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
|
||||
GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
|
||||
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
|
||||
DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
|
||||
PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
|
||||
EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
|
||||
SUCH DAMAGES.
|
||||
|
||||
17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
|
||||
|
||||
If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided
|
||||
above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
|
||||
reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates
|
||||
an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the
|
||||
Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a
|
||||
copy of the Program in return for a fee.
|
||||
|
||||
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
|
||||
|
||||
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
|
||||
|
||||
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
|
||||
possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
|
||||
free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
|
||||
|
||||
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest
|
||||
to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
|
||||
state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
|
||||
the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
|
||||
|
||||
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
|
||||
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
|
||||
|
||||
This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
|
||||
it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
|
||||
the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
|
||||
(at your option) any later version.
|
||||
|
||||
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
|
||||
but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
|
||||
MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
|
||||
GNU General Public License for more details.
|
||||
|
||||
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
||||
along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
|
||||
|
||||
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
|
||||
|
||||
If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short
|
||||
notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
|
||||
|
||||
<program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
|
||||
This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
|
||||
This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
|
||||
under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
|
||||
|
||||
The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
|
||||
parts of the General Public License. Of course, your program's commands
|
||||
might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box".
|
||||
|
||||
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school,
|
||||
if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary.
|
||||
For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see
|
||||
<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
|
||||
|
||||
The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program
|
||||
into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you
|
||||
may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with
|
||||
the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
|
||||
Public License instead of this License. But first, please read
|
||||
<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.
|
|
@ -1,10 +1,11 @@
|
|||
if(WIN32)
|
||||
add_definitions(-D_MSWVC_)
|
||||
else(WIN32)
|
||||
add_definitions(-D__UNIX__)
|
||||
endif(WIN32)
|
||||
IF(WIN32)
|
||||
ADD_DEFINITIONS( -D_MSWVC_ )
|
||||
ELSE(WIN32)
|
||||
ADD_DEFINITIONS( -D__UNIX__ )
|
||||
ENDIF(WIN32)
|
||||
|
||||
include_directories(${kbool_SOURCE_DIR}/include)
|
||||
|
||||
include_directories(../include)
|
||||
|
||||
set(KBOOL_SRCS
|
||||
booleng.cpp
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -1,40 +1,36 @@
|
|||
/*! \file kbool/src/booleng.cpp
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
/*! \file src/booleng.cpp
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: booleng.cpp,v 1.11 2005/05/24 19:13:38 titato Exp $
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: booleng.cpp,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:22 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef __GNUG__
|
||||
#pragma implementation
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
#include <time.h>
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/link.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/line.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/node.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/graph.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/graphlst.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/line.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/node.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graph.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graphlst.h"
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT bmin(B_INT const value1, B_INT const value2)
|
||||
B_INT bmin( B_INT const value1, B_INT const value2 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return((value1 < value2) ? value1 : value2 );
|
||||
return( ( value1 < value2 ) ? value1 : value2 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT bmax(B_INT const value1, B_INT const value2)
|
||||
B_INT bmax( B_INT const value1, B_INT const value2 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return((value1 > value2) ? value1 : value2 );
|
||||
return( ( value1 > value2 ) ? value1 : value2 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT babs(B_INT a)
|
||||
B_INT babs( B_INT a )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (a < 0) a=-a;
|
||||
if ( a < 0 ) a = -a;
|
||||
return a;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -42,38 +38,38 @@ B_INT babs(B_INT a)
|
|||
//----------------- Bool_Engine_Error -------------------------------/
|
||||
//-------------------------------------------------------------------/
|
||||
|
||||
Bool_Engine_Error::Bool_Engine_Error(const char* message, const char* header, int degree, int fatal)
|
||||
Bool_Engine_Error::Bool_Engine_Error( const char* message, const char* header, int degree, int fatal )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_message = new char[LINELENGTH];
|
||||
_header = new char[LINELENGTH];
|
||||
if (message)
|
||||
strcpy(_message, message);
|
||||
if ( message )
|
||||
strcpy( _message, message );
|
||||
else
|
||||
strcpy(_message,"non specified");
|
||||
strcpy( _message, "non specified" );
|
||||
|
||||
if (header)
|
||||
strcpy(_header, header);
|
||||
if ( header )
|
||||
strcpy( _header, header );
|
||||
else
|
||||
strcpy(_header,"non specified");
|
||||
strcpy( _header, "non specified" );
|
||||
|
||||
_degree = degree;
|
||||
_fatal = fatal;
|
||||
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
Bool_Engine_Error::Bool_Engine_Error(const Bool_Engine_Error& a)
|
||||
Bool_Engine_Error::Bool_Engine_Error( const Bool_Engine_Error& a )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_message = new char[LINELENGTH];
|
||||
_header = new char[LINELENGTH];
|
||||
if (a._message)
|
||||
strcpy(_message, a._message);
|
||||
if ( a._message )
|
||||
strcpy( _message, a._message );
|
||||
else
|
||||
strcpy(_message,"non specified");
|
||||
strcpy( _message, "non specified" );
|
||||
|
||||
if (a._header)
|
||||
strcpy(_header, a._header);
|
||||
if ( a._header )
|
||||
strcpy( _header, a._header );
|
||||
else
|
||||
strcpy(_header,"non specified");
|
||||
strcpy( _header, "non specified" );
|
||||
|
||||
_degree = a._degree;
|
||||
_fatal = a._fatal;
|
||||
|
@ -82,8 +78,8 @@ Bool_Engine_Error::Bool_Engine_Error(const Bool_Engine_Error& a)
|
|||
|
||||
Bool_Engine_Error::~Bool_Engine_Error()
|
||||
{
|
||||
strcpy(_message,"");
|
||||
strcpy(_header,"");
|
||||
strcpy( _message, "" );
|
||||
strcpy( _header, "" );
|
||||
delete _message;
|
||||
delete _header;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -114,13 +110,13 @@ int Bool_Engine_Error::GetFatal()
|
|||
|
||||
Bool_Engine::Bool_Engine()
|
||||
{
|
||||
_linkiter=new TDLI<KBoolLink>();
|
||||
_linkiter = new TDLI<KBoolLink>();
|
||||
m_intersectionruns = 1;
|
||||
|
||||
m_orientationEntryMode = false;
|
||||
m_doLinkHoles = true;
|
||||
|
||||
m_graphlist = new GraphList(this);
|
||||
m_graphlist = new GraphList( this );
|
||||
m_ACCUR = 1e-4;
|
||||
m_WINDINGRULE = true;
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd = NULL;
|
||||
|
@ -138,8 +134,8 @@ Bool_Engine::Bool_Engine()
|
|||
|
||||
Bool_Engine::~Bool_Engine()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (m_logfile != NULL)
|
||||
fclose (m_logfile);
|
||||
if ( m_logfile != NULL )
|
||||
fclose ( m_logfile );
|
||||
|
||||
delete _linkiter;
|
||||
delete m_graphlist;
|
||||
|
@ -153,25 +149,25 @@ void Bool_Engine::SetLog( bool OnOff )
|
|||
if ( m_logfile == NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// create a new logfile
|
||||
m_logfile = fopen(KBOOL_LOGFILE, "w");
|
||||
if (m_logfile == NULL)
|
||||
fprintf(stderr,"Bool_Engine: Unable to write to Boolean Engine logfile\n");
|
||||
m_logfile = fopen( KBOOL_LOGFILE, "w" );
|
||||
if ( m_logfile == NULL )
|
||||
fprintf( stderr, "Bool_Engine: Unable to write to Boolean Engine logfile\n" );
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
time_t timer;
|
||||
struct tm * today;
|
||||
timer = time(NULL);
|
||||
today = localtime(&timer);
|
||||
timer = time( NULL );
|
||||
today = localtime( &timer );
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf(m_logfile, "Logfile created on:\t\t\t%s", ctime( &timer ) );
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, "Logfile created on:\t\t\t%s", ctime( &timer ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (m_logfile != NULL)
|
||||
if ( m_logfile != NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fclose (m_logfile);
|
||||
fclose ( m_logfile );
|
||||
m_logfile = NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -179,26 +175,26 @@ void Bool_Engine::SetLog( bool OnOff )
|
|||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetState( const char* process )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Write_Log(process);
|
||||
Write_Log( process );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::error(const char *text,const char *title)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::error( const char *text, const char *title )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Write_Log("FATAL ERROR: ", title);
|
||||
Write_Log("FATAL ERROR: ", text);
|
||||
throw Bool_Engine_Error(" Fatal Error", "Fatal Error", 9, 1);
|
||||
Write_Log( "FATAL ERROR: ", title );
|
||||
Write_Log( "FATAL ERROR: ", text );
|
||||
throw Bool_Engine_Error( " Fatal Error", "Fatal Error", 9, 1 );
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::info(const char *text, const char *title)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::info( const char *text, const char *title )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Write_Log("FATAL ERROR: ", title);
|
||||
Write_Log("FATAL ERROR: ", text);
|
||||
Write_Log( "FATAL ERROR: ", title );
|
||||
Write_Log( "FATAL ERROR: ", text );
|
||||
};
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetMarge(double marge)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetMarge( double marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_MARGE = marge;
|
||||
Write_Log("Bool_Engine::m_MARGE = %f\n", m_MARGE);
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_MARGE = %f\n", m_MARGE );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetAccur()
|
||||
|
@ -206,10 +202,10 @@ double Bool_Engine::GetAccur()
|
|||
return m_ACCUR;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetRoundfactor(double roundfac)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetRoundfactor( double roundfac )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_ROUNDFACTOR = roundfac;
|
||||
Write_Log("Bool_Engine::m_ROUNDFACTOR = %f\n", m_ROUNDFACTOR);
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_ROUNDFACTOR = %f\n", m_ROUNDFACTOR );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetRoundfactor()
|
||||
|
@ -222,10 +218,10 @@ double Bool_Engine::GetMarge()
|
|||
return m_MARGE;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetDGrid(double dgrid)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetDGrid( double dgrid )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_DGRID = dgrid;
|
||||
Write_Log("Bool_Engine::m_DGRID = %f\n", m_DGRID);
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_DGRID = %f\n", m_DGRID );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetDGrid()
|
||||
|
@ -233,10 +229,10 @@ double Bool_Engine::GetDGrid()
|
|||
return m_DGRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetGrid(B_INT grid)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetGrid( B_INT grid )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_GRID = grid;
|
||||
Write_Log("Bool_Engine::m_GRID = %lld\n", m_GRID);
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_GRID = %lld\n", m_GRID );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT Bool_Engine::GetGrid()
|
||||
|
@ -244,10 +240,10 @@ B_INT Bool_Engine::GetGrid()
|
|||
return m_GRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetCorrectionAber(double aber)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetCorrectionAber( double aber )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_CORRECTIONABER = aber;
|
||||
Write_Log("Bool_Engine::m_CORRECTIONABER = %f\n", m_CORRECTIONABER);
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_CORRECTIONABER = %f\n", m_CORRECTIONABER );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetCorrectionAber()
|
||||
|
@ -255,10 +251,10 @@ double Bool_Engine::GetCorrectionAber()
|
|||
return m_CORRECTIONABER;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetCorrectionFactor(double aber)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetCorrectionFactor( double aber )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_CORRECTIONFACTOR = aber;
|
||||
Write_Log("Bool_Engine::m_CORRECTIONFACTOR = %f\n", m_CORRECTIONFACTOR );
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_CORRECTIONFACTOR = %f\n", m_CORRECTIONFACTOR );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetCorrectionFactor()
|
||||
|
@ -266,10 +262,10 @@ double Bool_Engine::GetCorrectionFactor()
|
|||
return m_CORRECTIONFACTOR;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetSmoothAber(double aber)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetSmoothAber( double aber )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_SMOOTHABER = aber;
|
||||
Write_Log("Bool_Engine::m_SMOOTHABER = %f\n",m_SMOOTHABER );
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_SMOOTHABER = %f\n", m_SMOOTHABER );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetSmoothAber()
|
||||
|
@ -277,10 +273,10 @@ double Bool_Engine::GetSmoothAber()
|
|||
return m_SMOOTHABER;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetMaxlinemerge(double maxline)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetMaxlinemerge( double maxline )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_MAXLINEMERGE = maxline;
|
||||
Write_Log("Bool_Engine::m_MAXLINEMERGE = %f\n",m_MAXLINEMERGE );
|
||||
Write_Log( "Bool_Engine::m_MAXLINEMERGE = %f\n", m_MAXLINEMERGE );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetMaxlinemerge()
|
||||
|
@ -288,7 +284,7 @@ double Bool_Engine::GetMaxlinemerge()
|
|||
return m_MAXLINEMERGE;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetWindingRule(bool rule)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetWindingRule( bool rule )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_WINDINGRULE = rule;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -301,104 +297,104 @@ bool Bool_Engine::GetWindingRule()
|
|||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::SetInternalMarge( B_INT marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_MARGE = (double)marge/m_GRID/m_DGRID;
|
||||
m_MARGE = ( double )marge / m_GRID / m_DGRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT Bool_Engine::GetInternalMarge()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return (B_INT) ( m_MARGE*m_GRID*m_DGRID );
|
||||
return ( B_INT ) ( m_MARGE * m_GRID * m_DGRID );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetInternalCorrectionAber()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_CORRECTIONABER*m_GRID*m_DGRID;
|
||||
return m_CORRECTIONABER * m_GRID * m_DGRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetInternalCorrectionFactor()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_CORRECTIONFACTOR*m_GRID*m_DGRID;
|
||||
return m_CORRECTIONFACTOR * m_GRID * m_DGRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetInternalSmoothAber()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_SMOOTHABER*m_GRID*m_DGRID;
|
||||
return m_SMOOTHABER * m_GRID * m_DGRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT Bool_Engine::GetInternalMaxlinemerge()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return (B_INT) ( m_MAXLINEMERGE*m_GRID*m_DGRID );
|
||||
return ( B_INT ) ( m_MAXLINEMERGE * m_GRID * m_DGRID );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
#define TRIALS 30
|
||||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::Do_Operation(BOOL_OP operation)
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::Do_Operation( BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
GraphList* saveme = new GraphList( m_graphlist );
|
||||
GraphList * saveme = new GraphList( m_graphlist );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
try
|
||||
{
|
||||
switch (operation)
|
||||
switch ( operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case (BOOL_OR):
|
||||
case (BOOL_AND):
|
||||
case (BOOL_EXOR):
|
||||
case (BOOL_A_SUB_B):
|
||||
case (BOOL_B_SUB_A):
|
||||
m_graphlist->Boolean(operation, m_intersectionruns);
|
||||
case ( BOOL_OR ):
|
||||
case ( BOOL_AND ):
|
||||
case ( BOOL_EXOR ):
|
||||
case ( BOOL_A_SUB_B ):
|
||||
case ( BOOL_B_SUB_A ):
|
||||
m_graphlist->Boolean( operation, m_intersectionruns );
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case (BOOL_CORRECTION):
|
||||
case ( BOOL_CORRECTION ):
|
||||
m_graphlist->Correction();
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case (BOOL_MAKERING):
|
||||
case ( BOOL_MAKERING ):
|
||||
m_graphlist->MakeRings();
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case (BOOL_SMOOTHEN):
|
||||
case ( BOOL_SMOOTHEN ):
|
||||
m_graphlist->Smoothen( GetInternalSmoothAber() );
|
||||
break;
|
||||
default:
|
||||
{
|
||||
error("Wrong operation","Command Error");
|
||||
error( "Wrong operation", "Command Error" );
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
catch (Bool_Engine_Error& error)
|
||||
catch ( Bool_Engine_Error & error )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
delete m_graphlist;
|
||||
m_graphlist = new GraphList( saveme );
|
||||
m_graphlist->WriteGraphsKEY(this);
|
||||
m_graphlist->WriteGraphsKEY( this );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
if (m_logfile != NULL)
|
||||
if ( m_logfile != NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fclose (m_logfile);
|
||||
fclose ( m_logfile );
|
||||
m_logfile = NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
info(error.GetErrorMessage(), "error");
|
||||
info( error.GetErrorMessage(), "error" );
|
||||
throw error;
|
||||
}
|
||||
catch(...)
|
||||
catch( ... )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
delete m_graphlist;
|
||||
m_graphlist = new GraphList( saveme );
|
||||
m_graphlist->WriteGraphsKEY(this);
|
||||
m_graphlist->WriteGraphsKEY( this );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
if (m_logfile != NULL)
|
||||
if ( m_logfile != NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fclose (m_logfile);
|
||||
fclose ( m_logfile );
|
||||
m_logfile = NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
info("Unknown exception", "error");
|
||||
info( "Unknown exception", "error" );
|
||||
throw ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -409,68 +405,68 @@ bool Bool_Engine::Do_Operation(BOOL_OP operation)
|
|||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::StartPolygonAdd(GroupType A_or_B)
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::StartPolygonAdd( GroupType A_or_B )
|
||||
{
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
if (m_logfile != NULL)
|
||||
fprintf(m_logfile, "-> StartPolygonAdd(%d)\n", A_or_B);
|
||||
if ( m_logfile != NULL )
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, "-> StartPolygonAdd(%d)\n", A_or_B );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
if (m_GraphToAdd != NULL)
|
||||
if ( m_GraphToAdd != NULL )
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
|
||||
Graph *myGraph = new Graph(this);
|
||||
m_graphlist->insbegin(myGraph);
|
||||
Graph *myGraph = new Graph( this );
|
||||
m_graphlist->insbegin( myGraph );
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd = myGraph;
|
||||
m_groupType = A_or_B;
|
||||
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::AddPoint(double x, double y)
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::AddPoint( double x, double y )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (m_GraphToAdd == NULL){return false;}
|
||||
if ( m_GraphToAdd == NULL ){return false;}
|
||||
|
||||
double scaledx = x * m_DGRID * m_GRID;
|
||||
double scaledy = y * m_DGRID * m_GRID;
|
||||
|
||||
if ( scaledx > MAXB_INT || scaledx < MINB_INT )
|
||||
error("X coordinate of vertex to big", "" );
|
||||
error( "X coordinate of vertex to big", "" );
|
||||
if ( scaledy > MAXB_INT || scaledy < MINB_INT )
|
||||
error("Y coordinate of vertex to big", "" );
|
||||
error( "Y coordinate of vertex to big", "" );
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT rintx = ((B_INT) (x * m_DGRID)) * m_GRID;
|
||||
B_INT rinty = ((B_INT) (y * m_DGRID)) * m_GRID;
|
||||
B_INT rintx = ( ( B_INT ) ( x * m_DGRID ) ) * m_GRID;
|
||||
B_INT rinty = ( ( B_INT ) ( y * m_DGRID ) ) * m_GRID;
|
||||
Node *myNode = new Node( rintx, rinty, this );
|
||||
|
||||
// adding first point to graph
|
||||
if (m_firstNodeToAdd == NULL)
|
||||
if ( m_firstNodeToAdd == NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
if (m_logfile != NULL)
|
||||
if ( m_logfile != NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fprintf(m_logfile, "-> AddPt() *FIRST* :");
|
||||
fprintf(m_logfile, " input: x = %f, y = %f\n", x, y);
|
||||
fprintf(m_logfile, " input: x = %I64d, y = %I64d\n", rintx, rinty) ;
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, "-> AddPt() *FIRST* :" );
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, " input: x = %f, y = %f\n", x, y );
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, " input: x = %I64d, y = %I64d\n", rintx, rinty ) ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
m_firstNodeToAdd = (Node *) myNode;
|
||||
m_lastNodeToAdd = (Node *) myNode;
|
||||
m_firstNodeToAdd = ( Node * ) myNode;
|
||||
m_lastNodeToAdd = ( Node * ) myNode;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
if (m_logfile != NULL)
|
||||
if ( m_logfile != NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fprintf(m_logfile, "-> AddPt():");
|
||||
fprintf(m_logfile, " input: x = %f, y = %f\n", x, y);
|
||||
fprintf(m_logfile, " input: x = %I64d, y = %I64d\n", rintx, rinty) ;
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, "-> AddPt():" );
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, " input: x = %f, y = %f\n", x, y );
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, " input: x = %I64d, y = %I64d\n", rintx, rinty ) ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd->AddLink(m_lastNodeToAdd, myNode);
|
||||
m_lastNodeToAdd = (Node *) myNode;
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd->AddLink( m_lastNodeToAdd, myNode );
|
||||
m_lastNodeToAdd = ( Node * ) myNode;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
|
@ -478,10 +474,10 @@ bool Bool_Engine::AddPoint(double x, double y)
|
|||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::EndPolygonAdd()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (m_GraphToAdd == NULL) {return false;}
|
||||
if ( m_GraphToAdd == NULL ) {return false;}
|
||||
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd->AddLink(m_lastNodeToAdd, m_firstNodeToAdd);
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd->SetGroup(m_groupType);
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd->AddLink( m_lastNodeToAdd, m_firstNodeToAdd );
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd->SetGroup( m_groupType );
|
||||
m_GraphToAdd = NULL;
|
||||
m_lastNodeToAdd = NULL;
|
||||
m_firstNodeToAdd = NULL;
|
||||
|
@ -491,9 +487,9 @@ bool Bool_Engine::EndPolygonAdd()
|
|||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::StartPolygonGet()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (!m_graphlist->empty())
|
||||
if ( !m_graphlist->empty() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_getGraph = (Graph*) m_graphlist->headitem();
|
||||
m_getGraph = ( Graph* ) m_graphlist->headitem();
|
||||
m_getLink = m_getGraph->GetFirstLink();
|
||||
m_getNode = m_getLink->GetBeginNode();
|
||||
m_numPtsInPolygon = m_getGraph->GetNumberOfLinks();
|
||||
|
@ -509,18 +505,18 @@ bool Bool_Engine::StartPolygonGet()
|
|||
bool Bool_Engine::PolygonHasMorePoints()
|
||||
{
|
||||
// see if first point
|
||||
if (m_numNodesVisited == 0)
|
||||
if ( m_numNodesVisited == 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// don't need to touch the m_getNode
|
||||
m_numNodesVisited++;
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
if (m_numNodesVisited < m_numPtsInPolygon)
|
||||
if ( m_numNodesVisited < m_numPtsInPolygon )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// traverse to the next node
|
||||
m_getNode = m_getLink->GetOther(m_getNode);
|
||||
m_getLink = m_getLink->Forth(m_getNode);
|
||||
m_getNode = m_getLink->GetOther( m_getNode );
|
||||
m_getLink = m_getLink->Forth( m_getNode );
|
||||
|
||||
m_numNodesVisited++;
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
|
@ -539,24 +535,24 @@ void Bool_Engine::EndPolygonGet()
|
|||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetPolygonXPoint()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_getNode->GetX()/m_GRID/m_DGRID;
|
||||
return m_getNode->GetX() / m_GRID / m_DGRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
double Bool_Engine::GetPolygonYPoint()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return m_getNode->GetY()/m_GRID/m_DGRID;
|
||||
return m_getNode->GetY() / m_GRID / m_DGRID;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::GetHoleSegment()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (m_getLink->GetHole())
|
||||
if ( m_getLink->GetHole() )
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool Bool_Engine::GetHoleConnectionSegment()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (m_getLink->GetHoleLink())
|
||||
if ( m_getLink->GetHoleLink() )
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -575,34 +571,34 @@ kbEdgeType Bool_Engine::GetPolygonPointEdgeType()
|
|||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::Write_Log(const char *msg1)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::Write_Log( const char *msg1 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (m_logfile == NULL)
|
||||
if ( m_logfile == NULL )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf(m_logfile,"%s \n",msg1);
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, "%s \n", msg1 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::Write_Log(const char *msg1, const char*msg2)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::Write_Log( const char *msg1, const char*msg2 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (m_logfile == NULL)
|
||||
if ( m_logfile == NULL )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf(m_logfile,"%s %s\n",msg1, msg2);
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, "%s %s\n", msg1, msg2 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::Write_Log(const char *fmt, double dval)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::Write_Log( const char *fmt, double dval )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (m_logfile == NULL)
|
||||
if ( m_logfile == NULL )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf(m_logfile,fmt,dval);
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, fmt, dval );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::Write_Log(const char *fmt, B_INT bval)
|
||||
void Bool_Engine::Write_Log( const char *fmt, B_INT bval )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (m_logfile == NULL)
|
||||
if ( m_logfile == NULL )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf(m_logfile,fmt,bval);
|
||||
fprintf( m_logfile, fmt, bval );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
|
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
|
@ -1,21 +1,17 @@
|
|||
/*! \file ../src/graphlst.cpp
|
||||
/*! \file src/graphlst.cpp
|
||||
\brief Implements a list of graphs
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: graphlst.cpp,v 1.8 2005/05/24 19:13:38 titato Exp $
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: graphlst.cpp,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:22 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef __GNUG__
|
||||
#pragma implementation
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
//#include "debugdrv.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/graphlst.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graphlst.h"
|
||||
|
||||
//extern Debug_driver* _debug_driver;
|
||||
//this here is to initialize the static iterator of graphlist
|
||||
|
@ -24,9 +20,9 @@
|
|||
int graphsorterX( Graph *, Graph * );
|
||||
int graphsorterY( Graph *, Graph * );
|
||||
|
||||
GraphList::GraphList(Bool_Engine* GC)
|
||||
GraphList::GraphList( Bool_Engine* GC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC=GC;
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
GraphList::GraphList( GraphList* other )
|
||||
|
@ -35,7 +31,7 @@ GraphList::GraphList( GraphList* other )
|
|||
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI = TDLI<Graph>( other );
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_LI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
insend( new Graph( _LI.item() ) );
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
|
@ -44,29 +40,29 @@ GraphList::GraphList( GraphList* other )
|
|||
|
||||
GraphList::~GraphList()
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI=TDLI<Graph>(this);
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI = TDLI<Graph>( this );
|
||||
//first empty the graph
|
||||
_LI.delete_all();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//prepare the graphlist for the boolean operations
|
||||
//group all graphs into ONE graph
|
||||
void GraphList::Prepare(Graph* total)
|
||||
void GraphList::Prepare( Graph* total )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (empty())
|
||||
if ( empty() )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
//round to grid and put in one graph
|
||||
_GC->SetState("Simplify");
|
||||
_GC->SetState( "Simplify" );
|
||||
|
||||
// Simplify all graphs in the list
|
||||
Simplify( (double) _GC->GetGrid() );
|
||||
Simplify( ( double ) _GC->GetGrid() );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( ! _GC->GetOrientationEntryMode() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI=TDLI<Graph>(this);
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI = TDLI<Graph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_LI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.item()->MakeClockWise();
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
|
@ -76,19 +72,19 @@ void GraphList::Prepare(Graph* total)
|
|||
Renumber();
|
||||
|
||||
//the graplist contents will be transferred to one graph
|
||||
MakeOneGraph(total);
|
||||
MakeOneGraph( total );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// the function will make from all the graphs in the graphlist one graph,
|
||||
// simply by throwing all the links in one graph, the graphnumbers will
|
||||
// not be changed
|
||||
void GraphList::MakeOneGraph(Graph* total)
|
||||
void GraphList::MakeOneGraph( Graph* total )
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI=TDLI<Graph>(this);
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI = TDLI<Graph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while(!_LI.hitroot())
|
||||
while( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
total->TakeOver(_LI.item());
|
||||
total->TakeOver( _LI.item() );
|
||||
delete _LI.item();
|
||||
_LI.remove();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -101,25 +97,25 @@ void GraphList::Renumber()
|
|||
{
|
||||
if ( _GC->GetOrientationEntryMode() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI=TDLI<Graph>(this);
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI = TDLI<Graph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_LI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( _LI.item()->GetFirstLink()->Group() == GROUP_A )
|
||||
_LI.item()->SetNumber(1);
|
||||
_LI.item()->SetNumber( 1 );
|
||||
else
|
||||
_LI.item()->SetNumber(2);
|
||||
_LI.item()->SetNumber( 2 );
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
unsigned int Number = 1;
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI=TDLI<Graph>(this);
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI = TDLI<Graph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_LI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.item()->SetNumber(Number++);
|
||||
_LI.item()->SetNumber( Number++ );
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -127,17 +123,17 @@ void GraphList::Renumber()
|
|||
|
||||
|
||||
// Simplify the graphs
|
||||
void GraphList::Simplify(double marge)
|
||||
void GraphList::Simplify( double marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI=TDLI<Graph>(this);
|
||||
_LI.foreach_mf(&Graph::Reset_Mark_and_Bin);
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI = TDLI<Graph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.foreach_mf( &Graph::Reset_Mark_and_Bin );
|
||||
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_LI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (_LI.item()->Simplify( (B_INT) marge))
|
||||
if ( _LI.item()->Simplify( ( B_INT ) marge ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (_LI.item()->GetNumberOfLinks() < 3)
|
||||
if ( _LI.item()->GetNumberOfLinks() < 3 )
|
||||
// delete this graph from the graphlist
|
||||
{
|
||||
delete _LI.item();
|
||||
|
@ -150,17 +146,17 @@ void GraphList::Simplify(double marge)
|
|||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// Smoothen the graphs
|
||||
void GraphList::Smoothen(double marge)
|
||||
void GraphList::Smoothen( double marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI=TDLI<Graph>(this);
|
||||
_LI.foreach_mf(&Graph::Reset_Mark_and_Bin);
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI = TDLI<Graph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.foreach_mf( &Graph::Reset_Mark_and_Bin );
|
||||
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_LI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (_LI.item()->Smoothen( (B_INT) marge))
|
||||
if ( _LI.item()->Smoothen( ( B_INT ) marge ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (_LI.item()->GetNumberOfLinks() < 3)
|
||||
if ( _LI.item()->GetNumberOfLinks() < 3 )
|
||||
// delete this graph from the graphlist
|
||||
{
|
||||
delete _LI.item();
|
||||
|
@ -176,8 +172,8 @@ void GraphList::Smoothen(double marge)
|
|||
// Turn off all markers in all the graphs
|
||||
void GraphList::UnMarkAll()
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI=TDLI<Graph>(this);
|
||||
_LI.foreach_mf(&Graph::Reset_Mark_and_Bin);
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI = TDLI<Graph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.foreach_mf( &Graph::Reset_Mark_and_Bin );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//==============================================================================
|
||||
|
@ -188,59 +184,59 @@ void GraphList::UnMarkAll()
|
|||
|
||||
void GraphList::Correction()
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI=TDLI<Graph>(this);
|
||||
int todo=_LI.count();
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI = TDLI<Graph>( this );
|
||||
int todo = _LI.count();
|
||||
|
||||
if ( _GC->GetInternalCorrectionFactor()) //not zero
|
||||
if ( _GC->GetInternalCorrectionFactor() ) //not zero
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
for(int i=0; i<todo ; i++)
|
||||
for( int i = 0; i < todo ; i++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//the input graph will be empty in the end
|
||||
GraphList *_correct=new GraphList(_GC);
|
||||
GraphList *_correct = new GraphList( _GC );
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.item()->MakeClockWise();
|
||||
_LI.item()->Correction(_correct,_GC->GetInternalCorrectionFactor());
|
||||
_LI.item()->Correction( _correct, _GC->GetInternalCorrectionFactor() );
|
||||
|
||||
delete _LI.item();
|
||||
_LI.remove();
|
||||
|
||||
//move corrected graphlist to result
|
||||
while (!_correct->empty())
|
||||
while ( !_correct->empty() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//add to end
|
||||
_LI.insend((Graph*)_correct->headitem());
|
||||
_LI.insend( ( Graph* )_correct->headitem() );
|
||||
_correct->removehead();
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
delete _correct;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void GraphList::MakeRings()
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI=TDLI<Graph>(this);
|
||||
int todo=_LI.count();
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI = TDLI<Graph>( this );
|
||||
int todo = _LI.count();
|
||||
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
for(int i=0; i<todo ; i++)
|
||||
for( int i = 0; i < todo ; i++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//the input graph will be empty in the end
|
||||
GraphList *_ring=new GraphList(_GC);
|
||||
GraphList *_ring = new GraphList( _GC );
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.item()->MakeClockWise();
|
||||
_LI.item()->MakeRing(_ring,_GC->GetInternalCorrectionFactor());
|
||||
_LI.item()->MakeRing( _ring, _GC->GetInternalCorrectionFactor() );
|
||||
|
||||
delete _LI.item();
|
||||
_LI.remove();
|
||||
|
||||
//move created rings graphs to this
|
||||
while (!_ring->empty())
|
||||
while ( !_ring->empty() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//add to end
|
||||
((Graph*)_ring->headitem())->MakeClockWise();
|
||||
_LI.insend((Graph*)_ring->headitem());
|
||||
( ( Graph* )_ring->headitem() )->MakeClockWise();
|
||||
_LI.insend( ( Graph* )_ring->headitem() );
|
||||
_ring->removehead();
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -252,29 +248,29 @@ void GraphList::MakeRings()
|
|||
//merge the graphs in the list and return the merged result
|
||||
void GraphList::Merge()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (count()<=1)
|
||||
if ( count() <= 1 )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI=TDLI<Graph>(this);
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI = TDLI<Graph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_LI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.item()->SetGroup(GROUP_A);
|
||||
_LI.item()->SetGroup( GROUP_A );
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
Graph* _tomerge=new Graph(_GC);
|
||||
Graph* _tomerge = new Graph( _GC );
|
||||
|
||||
Renumber();
|
||||
|
||||
//the graplist contents will be transferred to one graph
|
||||
MakeOneGraph(_tomerge);
|
||||
MakeOneGraph( _tomerge );
|
||||
//the original is empty now
|
||||
|
||||
_tomerge->Prepare(1);
|
||||
_tomerge->Boolean(BOOL_OR,this);
|
||||
_tomerge->Prepare( 1 );
|
||||
_tomerge->Boolean( BOOL_OR, this );
|
||||
|
||||
delete _tomerge;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -283,20 +279,20 @@ void GraphList::Merge()
|
|||
#define SAVEME 1
|
||||
|
||||
//perform boolean operation on the graphs in the list
|
||||
void GraphList::Boolean(BOOL_OP operation, int intersectionRunsMax )
|
||||
void GraphList::Boolean( BOOL_OP operation, int intersectionRunsMax )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC->SetState("Performing Boolean Operation");
|
||||
_GC->SetState( "Performing Boolean Operation" );
|
||||
|
||||
if (count()==0)
|
||||
if ( count() == 0 )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
Graph* _prepared = new Graph(_GC);
|
||||
Graph* _prepared = new Graph( _GC );
|
||||
|
||||
if (empty())
|
||||
if ( empty() )
|
||||
return;
|
||||
|
||||
//round to grid and put in one graph
|
||||
_GC->SetState("Simplify");
|
||||
_GC->SetState( "Simplify" );
|
||||
|
||||
int intersectionruns = 1;
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -306,40 +302,40 @@ void GraphList::Boolean(BOOL_OP operation, int intersectionRunsMax )
|
|||
{
|
||||
Prepare( _prepared );
|
||||
|
||||
if (_prepared->GetNumberOfLinks())
|
||||
if ( _prepared->GetNumberOfLinks() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//calculate intersections etc.
|
||||
_GC->SetState("prepare");
|
||||
_GC->SetState( "prepare" );
|
||||
_prepared->Prepare( intersectionruns );
|
||||
//_prepared->writegraph(true);
|
||||
_prepared->Boolean(operation,this);
|
||||
_prepared->Boolean( operation, this );
|
||||
}
|
||||
intersectionruns = intersectionRunsMax +1;
|
||||
intersectionruns = intersectionRunsMax + 1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
catch (Bool_Engine_Error& error)
|
||||
catch ( Bool_Engine_Error & error )
|
||||
{
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
_prepared->WriteGraphKEY(_GC);
|
||||
_prepared->WriteGraphKEY( _GC );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
intersectionruns++;
|
||||
if ( intersectionruns == intersectionRunsMax )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_prepared->WriteGraphKEY(_GC);
|
||||
_GC->info(error.GetErrorMessage(), "error");
|
||||
_prepared->WriteGraphKEY( _GC );
|
||||
_GC->info( error.GetErrorMessage(), "error" );
|
||||
throw error;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
catch(...)
|
||||
catch( ... )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG
|
||||
_prepared->WriteGraphKEY(_GC);
|
||||
_prepared->WriteGraphKEY( _GC );
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
intersectionruns++;
|
||||
if ( intersectionruns == intersectionRunsMax )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_prepared->WriteGraphKEY(_GC);
|
||||
_GC->info("Unknown exception", "error");
|
||||
_prepared->WriteGraphKEY( _GC );
|
||||
_GC->info( "Unknown exception", "error" );
|
||||
throw;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -351,9 +347,9 @@ void GraphList::Boolean(BOOL_OP operation, int intersectionRunsMax )
|
|||
|
||||
void GraphList::WriteGraphs()
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI=TDLI<Graph>(this);
|
||||
TDLI<Graph> _LI = TDLI<Graph>( this );
|
||||
_LI.tohead();
|
||||
while(!_LI.hitroot())
|
||||
while( !_LI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_LI.item()->writegraph( false );
|
||||
_LI++;
|
||||
|
@ -362,9 +358,9 @@ void GraphList::WriteGraphs()
|
|||
|
||||
void GraphList::WriteGraphsKEY( Bool_Engine* GC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
FILE* file = fopen("graphkeyfile.key", "w");
|
||||
FILE * file = fopen( "graphkeyfile.key", "w" );
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf(file,"\
|
||||
fprintf( file, "\
|
||||
HEADER 5; \
|
||||
BGNLIB; \
|
||||
LASTMOD {2-11-15 15:39:21}; \
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -1,25 +1,25 @@
|
|||
/*! \file ../src/instonly.cpp
|
||||
/*! \file kbool/src/instonly.cpp
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: instonly.cpp,v 1.5 2005/05/24 19:13:38 titato Exp $
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: instonly.cpp,v 1.2 2006/11/05 14:59:31 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef __GNUG__
|
||||
#pragma option -Jgd
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/_dl_itr.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/node.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/record.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/link.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/scanbeam.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/graph.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/graphlst.h"
|
||||
//#include "../include/misc.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/_dl_itr.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/node.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/record.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/_lnk_itr.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/scanbeam.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graph.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graphlst.h"
|
||||
//#include "kbool/misc.h"
|
||||
|
||||
template class DL_Node<void *>;
|
||||
template class DL_Iter<void *>;
|
||||
|
|
File diff suppressed because it is too large
Load Diff
|
@ -1,36 +1,32 @@
|
|||
/*! \file ../src/link.cpp
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
/*! \file src/link.cpp
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: link.cpp,v 1.10 2005/06/17 22:54:37 kbluck Exp $
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: link.cpp,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:22 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef __GNUG__
|
||||
#pragma implementation
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/link.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/line.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/line.h"
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
#include <assert.h>
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/node.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/graph.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/graphlst.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/node.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graph.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graphlst.h"
|
||||
|
||||
int linkXYsorter(KBoolLink *, KBoolLink *);
|
||||
int linkXYsorter( KBoolLink *, KBoolLink * );
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Default constructor
|
||||
//
|
||||
KBoolLink::KBoolLink(Bool_Engine* GC)
|
||||
KBoolLink::KBoolLink( Bool_Engine* GC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC=GC;
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
Reset();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -38,14 +34,14 @@ KBoolLink::KBoolLink(Bool_Engine* GC)
|
|||
//
|
||||
// This constructor makes this link a valid part of a graph
|
||||
//
|
||||
KBoolLink::KBoolLink(int graphnr, Node *begin, Node *end, Bool_Engine* GC)
|
||||
KBoolLink::KBoolLink( int graphnr, Node *begin, Node *end, Bool_Engine* GC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC=GC;
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
Reset();
|
||||
|
||||
// Set the references of the node and of this link correct
|
||||
begin->AddLink(this);
|
||||
end->AddLink(this);
|
||||
begin->AddLink( this );
|
||||
end->AddLink( this );
|
||||
m_beginnode = begin;
|
||||
m_endnode = end;
|
||||
m_graphnum = graphnr;
|
||||
|
@ -54,17 +50,17 @@ KBoolLink::KBoolLink(int graphnr, Node *begin, Node *end, Bool_Engine* GC)
|
|||
//
|
||||
// This constructor makes this link a valid part of a graph
|
||||
//
|
||||
KBoolLink::KBoolLink(Node *begin, Node *end, Bool_Engine* GC)
|
||||
KBoolLink::KBoolLink( Node *begin, Node *end, Bool_Engine* GC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC=GC;
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
Reset();
|
||||
|
||||
// Set the references of the node and of this link correct
|
||||
begin->AddLink(this);
|
||||
end->AddLink(this);
|
||||
m_beginnode=begin;
|
||||
m_endnode=end;
|
||||
m_graphnum=0;
|
||||
begin->AddLink( this );
|
||||
end->AddLink( this );
|
||||
m_beginnode = begin;
|
||||
m_endnode = end;
|
||||
m_graphnum = 0;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -81,7 +77,7 @@ KBoolLink::~KBoolLink()
|
|||
//
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::BeenHere()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (m_bin) return true;
|
||||
if ( m_bin ) return true;
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -102,10 +98,10 @@ void KBoolLink::TakeOverOperationFlags( KBoolLink* link )
|
|||
//
|
||||
// Returns the next link from the argument
|
||||
//
|
||||
KBoolLink* KBoolLink::Forth(Node *node)
|
||||
KBoolLink* KBoolLink::Forth( Node *node )
|
||||
{
|
||||
assert(node==m_beginnode || node==m_endnode);
|
||||
return node->GetOtherLink(this);
|
||||
assert( node == m_beginnode || node == m_endnode );
|
||||
return node->GetOtherLink( this );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
|
@ -149,7 +145,7 @@ bool KBoolLink::GetInc()
|
|||
// return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetInc(bool inc)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetInc( bool inc )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_Inc = inc;
|
||||
// Inc=0;
|
||||
|
@ -161,7 +157,7 @@ bool KBoolLink::GetLeftA()
|
|||
return m_LeftA;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetLeftA(bool la)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetLeftA( bool la )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_LeftA = la;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -171,7 +167,7 @@ bool KBoolLink::GetLeftB()
|
|||
return m_LeftB;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetLeftB(bool lb)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetLeftB( bool lb )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_LeftB = lb;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -181,7 +177,7 @@ bool KBoolLink::GetRightA()
|
|||
return m_RightA;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetRightA(bool ra)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetRightA( bool ra )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_RightA = ra;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -191,7 +187,7 @@ bool KBoolLink::GetRightB()
|
|||
return m_RightB;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetRightB(bool rb)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetRightB( bool rb )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_RightB = rb;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -200,50 +196,50 @@ void KBoolLink::SetRightB(bool rb)
|
|||
// This function is very popular by GP-faults
|
||||
// It returns the node different from a
|
||||
//
|
||||
Node* KBoolLink::GetOther(const Node *const a)
|
||||
Node* KBoolLink::GetOther( const Node *const a )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ( (a != m_beginnode) ? m_beginnode : m_endnode);
|
||||
return ( ( a != m_beginnode ) ? m_beginnode : m_endnode );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Is this marked for given operation
|
||||
//
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::IsMarked(BOOL_OP operation)
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::IsMarked( BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
switch (operation)
|
||||
switch ( operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case(BOOL_OR): return m_merge_L || m_merge_R;
|
||||
case(BOOL_AND): return m_intersect_L || m_intersect_R;
|
||||
case(BOOL_A_SUB_B): return m_a_substract_b_L || m_a_substract_b_R;
|
||||
case(BOOL_B_SUB_A): return m_b_substract_a_L || m_b_substract_a_R;
|
||||
case(BOOL_EXOR): return m_exor_L || m_exor_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_OR ): return m_merge_L || m_merge_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_AND ): return m_intersect_L || m_intersect_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_A_SUB_B ): return m_a_substract_b_L || m_a_substract_b_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_B_SUB_A ): return m_b_substract_a_L || m_b_substract_a_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_EXOR ): return m_exor_L || m_exor_R;
|
||||
default: return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::IsMarkedLeft(BOOL_OP operation)
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::IsMarkedLeft( BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
switch (operation)
|
||||
switch ( operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case(BOOL_OR): return m_merge_L;
|
||||
case(BOOL_AND): return m_intersect_L;
|
||||
case(BOOL_A_SUB_B): return m_a_substract_b_L;
|
||||
case(BOOL_B_SUB_A): return m_b_substract_a_L;
|
||||
case(BOOL_EXOR): return m_exor_L;
|
||||
case( BOOL_OR ): return m_merge_L;
|
||||
case( BOOL_AND ): return m_intersect_L;
|
||||
case( BOOL_A_SUB_B ): return m_a_substract_b_L;
|
||||
case( BOOL_B_SUB_A ): return m_b_substract_a_L;
|
||||
case( BOOL_EXOR ): return m_exor_L;
|
||||
default: return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::IsMarkedRight(BOOL_OP operation)
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::IsMarkedRight( BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
switch (operation)
|
||||
switch ( operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case(BOOL_OR): return m_merge_R;
|
||||
case(BOOL_AND): return m_intersect_R;
|
||||
case(BOOL_A_SUB_B): return m_a_substract_b_R;
|
||||
case(BOOL_B_SUB_A): return m_b_substract_a_R;
|
||||
case(BOOL_EXOR): return m_exor_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_OR ): return m_merge_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_AND ): return m_intersect_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_A_SUB_B ): return m_a_substract_b_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_B_SUB_A ): return m_b_substract_a_R;
|
||||
case( BOOL_EXOR ): return m_exor_R;
|
||||
default: return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -251,23 +247,23 @@ bool KBoolLink::IsMarkedRight(BOOL_OP operation)
|
|||
//
|
||||
// Is this a hole for given operation
|
||||
// beginnode must be to the left
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::IsHole(BOOL_OP operation)
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::IsHole( BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
bool topsideA,topsideB;
|
||||
bool topsideA, topsideB;
|
||||
|
||||
if (m_beginnode->GetX() < m_endnode->GetX()) //going to the right?
|
||||
if ( m_beginnode->GetX() < m_endnode->GetX() ) //going to the right?
|
||||
{ topsideA = m_RightA; topsideB = m_RightB; }
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ topsideA = m_LeftA; topsideB = m_LeftB; }
|
||||
|
||||
switch (operation)
|
||||
switch ( operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case(BOOL_OR): return ( !topsideB && !topsideA );
|
||||
case(BOOL_AND): return ( !topsideB || !topsideA );
|
||||
case(BOOL_A_SUB_B): return ( topsideB || !topsideA );
|
||||
case(BOOL_B_SUB_A): return ( topsideA || !topsideB );
|
||||
case(BOOL_EXOR): return !( (topsideB && !topsideA) || (!topsideB && topsideA) );
|
||||
case( BOOL_OR ): return ( !topsideB && !topsideA );
|
||||
case( BOOL_AND ): return ( !topsideB || !topsideA );
|
||||
case( BOOL_A_SUB_B ): return ( topsideB || !topsideA );
|
||||
case( BOOL_B_SUB_A ): return ( topsideA || !topsideB );
|
||||
case( BOOL_EXOR ): return !( ( topsideB && !topsideA ) || ( !topsideB && topsideA ) );
|
||||
default: return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -277,11 +273,11 @@ bool KBoolLink::IsHole(BOOL_OP operation)
|
|||
//
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::GetHole()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return (m_hole);
|
||||
return ( m_hole );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetHole(bool h)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetHole( bool h )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_hole = h;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -293,7 +289,7 @@ void KBoolLink::SetHole(bool h)
|
|||
bool KBoolLink::IsUnused()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return
|
||||
!(m_merge_L || m_merge_R ||
|
||||
!( m_merge_L || m_merge_R ||
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_L || m_a_substract_b_R ||
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_L || m_b_substract_a_R ||
|
||||
m_intersect_L || m_intersect_R ||
|
||||
|
@ -301,15 +297,15 @@ bool KBoolLink::IsUnused()
|
|||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::IsZero(B_INT marge)
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::IsZero( B_INT marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return (m_beginnode->Equal(m_endnode,marge)) ;
|
||||
return ( m_beginnode->Equal( m_endnode, marge ) ) ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::ShorterThan(B_INT marge)
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::ShorterThan( B_INT marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return (m_beginnode->ShorterThan(m_endnode,marge)) ;
|
||||
return ( m_beginnode->ShorterThan( m_endnode, marge ) ) ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -332,20 +328,20 @@ void KBoolLink::Mark()
|
|||
// The references to this link in the node will also be deleted
|
||||
// After doing that, link link can be deleted or be recycled.
|
||||
//
|
||||
void KBoolLink::MergeNodes(Node *const begin_or_end_node)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::MergeNodes( Node *const begin_or_end_node )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// assert(beginnode && endnode);
|
||||
// assert ((begin_or_end_node == beginnode)||(begin_or_end_node == endnode));
|
||||
|
||||
m_beginnode->RemoveLink(this);
|
||||
m_endnode->RemoveLink(this);
|
||||
m_beginnode->RemoveLink( this );
|
||||
m_endnode->RemoveLink( this );
|
||||
|
||||
if (m_endnode != m_beginnode)
|
||||
if ( m_endnode != m_beginnode )
|
||||
{ // only if beginnode and endnode are different nodes
|
||||
begin_or_end_node->Merge(GetOther(begin_or_end_node));
|
||||
begin_or_end_node->Merge( GetOther( begin_or_end_node ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
m_endnode = NULL;
|
||||
m_beginnode=NULL;
|
||||
m_beginnode = NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
|
@ -354,28 +350,29 @@ void KBoolLink::MergeNodes(Node *const begin_or_end_node)
|
|||
// Here Left and Right is defined as being left or right from
|
||||
// the this link towards the center (common) node
|
||||
//
|
||||
LinkStatus KBoolLink::OutProduct(KBoolLink* const two,double accur)
|
||||
LinkStatus KBoolLink::OutProduct( KBoolLink* const two, double accur )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Node* center;
|
||||
Node * center;
|
||||
double distance;
|
||||
if (two->GetBeginNode()->Equal(two->GetEndNode(), 1))
|
||||
assert(!two);
|
||||
if (GetBeginNode()->Equal(GetEndNode(), 1))
|
||||
assert(!this);
|
||||
KBoolLine* temp_line = new KBoolLine(this, _GC);
|
||||
if ( two->GetBeginNode()->Equal( two->GetEndNode(), 1 ) )
|
||||
assert( !two );
|
||||
if ( GetBeginNode()->Equal( GetEndNode(), 1 ) )
|
||||
assert( !this );
|
||||
KBoolLine* temp_line = new KBoolLine( this, _GC );
|
||||
|
||||
//the this link should connect to the other two link at at least one node
|
||||
if (m_endnode == two->m_endnode || m_endnode == two->m_beginnode)
|
||||
if ( m_endnode == two->m_endnode || m_endnode == two->m_beginnode )
|
||||
center = m_endnode;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ center = m_beginnode;
|
||||
{
|
||||
center = m_beginnode;
|
||||
// assert(center==two->endnode || center==two->beginnode);
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//here something tricky
|
||||
// the factor 10000.0 is needed to asure that the pointonline
|
||||
// is more accurate in this case compared to the intersection for graphs
|
||||
int uitp = temp_line->PointOnLine(two->GetOther(center), distance, accur);
|
||||
int uitp = temp_line->PointOnLine( two->GetOther( center ), distance, accur );
|
||||
|
||||
delete temp_line;
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -386,18 +383,18 @@ LinkStatus KBoolLink::OutProduct(KBoolLink* const two,double accur)
|
|||
return IS_ON;*/
|
||||
|
||||
//depending on direction of this link (going to or coming from centre)
|
||||
if (center == m_endnode)
|
||||
if ( center == m_endnode )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (uitp==LEFT_SIDE)
|
||||
if ( uitp == LEFT_SIDE )
|
||||
return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
if (uitp==RIGHT_SIDE)
|
||||
if ( uitp == RIGHT_SIDE )
|
||||
return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else //center=beginnode
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (uitp==LEFT_SIDE)
|
||||
if ( uitp == LEFT_SIDE )
|
||||
return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
if (uitp==RIGHT_SIDE)
|
||||
if ( uitp == RIGHT_SIDE )
|
||||
return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
return IS_ON;
|
||||
|
@ -408,7 +405,7 @@ LinkStatus KBoolLink::OutProduct(KBoolLink* const two,double accur)
|
|||
// the second link
|
||||
// Result = IS_ON | IS_LEFT | IS_RIGHT
|
||||
//
|
||||
LinkStatus KBoolLink::PointOnCorner(KBoolLink* const two, KBoolLink* const third)
|
||||
LinkStatus KBoolLink::PointOnCorner( KBoolLink* const two, KBoolLink* const third )
|
||||
{
|
||||
LinkStatus
|
||||
TwoToOne, // Position of two to this line
|
||||
|
@ -430,33 +427,33 @@ LinkStatus KBoolLink::PointOnCorner(KBoolLink* const two, KBoolLink* const third
|
|||
|
||||
|
||||
// Calculate the position of the links compared to eachother
|
||||
TwoToOne = OutProduct(two,_GC->GetAccur());
|
||||
ThirdToOne= OutProduct(third,_GC->GetAccur());
|
||||
TwoToOne = OutProduct( two, _GC->GetAccur() );
|
||||
ThirdToOne = OutProduct( third, _GC->GetAccur() );
|
||||
//center is used in outproduct to give de direction of two
|
||||
// this is why the result should be swapped
|
||||
ThirdToTwo= two->OutProduct(third,_GC->GetAccur());
|
||||
if (ThirdToTwo==IS_RIGHT)
|
||||
ThirdToTwo=IS_LEFT;
|
||||
else if (ThirdToTwo==IS_LEFT)
|
||||
ThirdToTwo=IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
ThirdToTwo = two->OutProduct( third, _GC->GetAccur() );
|
||||
if ( ThirdToTwo == IS_RIGHT )
|
||||
ThirdToTwo = IS_LEFT;
|
||||
else if ( ThirdToTwo == IS_LEFT )
|
||||
ThirdToTwo = IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
|
||||
// Select the result
|
||||
switch(TwoToOne)
|
||||
switch( TwoToOne )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// Line 2 lies on leftside of this line
|
||||
case IS_LEFT : if ((ThirdToOne==IS_RIGHT) || (ThirdToTwo==IS_RIGHT)) return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
else if ((ThirdToOne==IS_LEFT) && (ThirdToTwo==IS_LEFT)) return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
else Result=IS_ON; break;
|
||||
case IS_LEFT : if ( ( ThirdToOne == IS_RIGHT ) || ( ThirdToTwo == IS_RIGHT ) ) return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
else if ( ( ThirdToOne == IS_LEFT ) && ( ThirdToTwo == IS_LEFT ) ) return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
else Result = IS_ON; break;
|
||||
// Line 2 lies on this line
|
||||
case IS_ON : if ((ThirdToOne==IS_RIGHT) && (ThirdToTwo==IS_RIGHT)) return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
else if ((ThirdToOne==IS_LEFT) && (ThirdToTwo==IS_LEFT)) return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
case IS_ON : if ( ( ThirdToOne == IS_RIGHT ) && ( ThirdToTwo == IS_RIGHT ) ) return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
else if ( ( ThirdToOne == IS_LEFT ) && ( ThirdToTwo == IS_LEFT ) ) return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
// else if ((ThirdToOne==IS_RIGHT) && (ThirdToTwo==IS_LEFT)) return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
// else if ((ThirdToOne==IS_LEFT) && (ThirdToTwo==IS_RIGHT)) return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
else Result=IS_ON; break;
|
||||
else Result = IS_ON; break;
|
||||
// Line 2 lies on right side of this line
|
||||
case IS_RIGHT :if ((ThirdToOne==IS_RIGHT) && (ThirdToTwo==IS_RIGHT)) return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
else if ((ThirdToOne==IS_LEFT) || (ThirdToTwo==IS_LEFT)) return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
else Result=IS_ON; break;
|
||||
case IS_RIGHT : if ( ( ThirdToOne == IS_RIGHT ) && ( ThirdToTwo == IS_RIGHT ) ) return IS_RIGHT;
|
||||
else if ( ( ThirdToOne == IS_LEFT ) || ( ThirdToTwo == IS_LEFT ) ) return IS_LEFT;
|
||||
else Result = IS_ON; break;
|
||||
default: Result = IS_ON; assert( false );
|
||||
}
|
||||
return Result;
|
||||
|
@ -465,26 +462,27 @@ LinkStatus KBoolLink::PointOnCorner(KBoolLink* const two, KBoolLink* const third
|
|||
//
|
||||
// Remove the reference from this link to a_node
|
||||
//
|
||||
void KBoolLink::Remove(Node *a_node)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::Remove( Node *a_node )
|
||||
{
|
||||
(m_beginnode == a_node) ? m_beginnode = NULL : m_endnode = NULL;
|
||||
( m_beginnode == a_node ) ? m_beginnode = NULL : m_endnode = NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Replace oldnode by newnode and correct the references
|
||||
//
|
||||
void KBoolLink::Replace(Node *oldnode, Node *newnode)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::Replace( Node *oldnode, Node *newnode )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (m_beginnode == oldnode)
|
||||
{ m_beginnode->RemoveLink(this); // remove the reference to this
|
||||
newnode->AddLink(this); // let newnode refer to this
|
||||
if ( m_beginnode == oldnode )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_beginnode->RemoveLink( this ); // remove the reference to this
|
||||
newnode->AddLink( this ); // let newnode refer to this
|
||||
m_beginnode = newnode; // let this refer to newnode
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ //assert(endnode==oldnode);
|
||||
m_endnode->RemoveLink(this);
|
||||
newnode->AddLink(this);
|
||||
m_endnode->RemoveLink( this );
|
||||
newnode->AddLink( this );
|
||||
m_endnode = newnode;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -511,38 +509,38 @@ void KBoolLink::Reset_flags()
|
|||
m_hole_top = false; // link that is toplink of hole?
|
||||
m_group = GROUP_A; // Does this belong to group A or B ( o.a. for boolean operations between graphs)
|
||||
m_LeftA = false; // Is left in polygongroup A
|
||||
m_RightA= false; // Is right in polygon group A
|
||||
m_RightA = false; // Is right in polygon group A
|
||||
m_LeftB = false; // Is left in polygon group B
|
||||
m_RightB= false; // Is right in polygongroup B
|
||||
m_RightB = false; // Is right in polygongroup B
|
||||
m_mark = false; // General purose marker, internally unused
|
||||
m_holelink=false;
|
||||
m_holelink = false;
|
||||
|
||||
m_merge_L = m_merge_R = false; // Marker for Merge
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_L = m_a_substract_b_R = false; // Marker for substract
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_L = m_b_substract_a_R = false; // Marker for substract
|
||||
m_intersect_L = m_intersect_R = false; // Marker for intersect
|
||||
m_exor_L = m_exor_R= false; // Marker for Exor
|
||||
m_exor_L = m_exor_R = false; // Marker for Exor
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
// Refill this link by the arguments
|
||||
//
|
||||
void KBoolLink::Reset(Node *begin, Node *end,int graphnr)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::Reset( Node *begin, Node *end, int graphnr )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// Remove all the previous references
|
||||
UnLink();
|
||||
Reset();
|
||||
// Set the references of the node and of this link correct
|
||||
begin->AddLink(this);
|
||||
end->AddLink(this);
|
||||
begin->AddLink( this );
|
||||
end->AddLink( this );
|
||||
m_beginnode = begin;
|
||||
m_endnode = end;
|
||||
if (graphnr!=0)
|
||||
if ( graphnr != 0 )
|
||||
m_graphnum = graphnr;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void KBoolLink::Set(Node *begin, Node *end)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::Set( Node *begin, Node *end )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_beginnode = begin;
|
||||
m_endnode = end;
|
||||
|
@ -558,13 +556,13 @@ void KBoolLink::SetNotBeenHere()
|
|||
m_bin = false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetBeginNode(Node* new_node)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetBeginNode( Node* new_node )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_beginnode = new_node;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetEndNode(Node* new_node)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetEndNode( Node* new_node )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_endnode = new_node;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -575,7 +573,7 @@ void KBoolLink::SetEndNode(Node* new_node)
|
|||
//
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetGraphNum( int num )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_graphnum=num;
|
||||
m_graphnum = num;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
GroupType KBoolLink::Group()
|
||||
|
@ -587,9 +585,9 @@ GroupType KBoolLink::Group()
|
|||
//
|
||||
// Reset the groupflag to argument groep
|
||||
//
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetGroup(GroupType groep)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetGroup( GroupType groep )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_group= groep;
|
||||
m_group = groep;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -598,16 +596,18 @@ void KBoolLink::SetGroup(GroupType groep)
|
|||
//
|
||||
void KBoolLink::UnLink()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (m_beginnode)
|
||||
{ m_beginnode->RemoveLink(this);
|
||||
if (!m_beginnode->GetNumberOfLinks()) delete m_beginnode;
|
||||
if ( m_beginnode )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_beginnode->RemoveLink( this );
|
||||
if ( !m_beginnode->GetNumberOfLinks() ) delete m_beginnode;
|
||||
}
|
||||
m_beginnode=NULL;
|
||||
if (m_endnode)
|
||||
{ m_endnode->RemoveLink(this);
|
||||
if (!m_endnode->GetNumberOfLinks()) delete m_endnode;
|
||||
m_beginnode = NULL;
|
||||
if ( m_endnode )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_endnode->RemoveLink( this );
|
||||
if ( !m_endnode->GetNumberOfLinks() ) delete m_endnode;
|
||||
}
|
||||
m_endnode=NULL;
|
||||
m_endnode = NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -617,7 +617,7 @@ void KBoolLink::UnMark()
|
|||
m_bin = false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetMark(bool value)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetMark( bool value )
|
||||
{
|
||||
m_mark = value;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -627,7 +627,7 @@ void KBoolLink::SetMark(bool value)
|
|||
//
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::IsMarked() { return m_mark; }
|
||||
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetTopHole(bool value) { m_hole_top = value; }
|
||||
void KBoolLink::SetTopHole( bool value ) { m_hole_top = value; }
|
||||
|
||||
bool KBoolLink::IsTopHole() { return m_hole_top; }
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -651,52 +651,52 @@ void KBoolLink::SetLineTypes()
|
|||
m_merge_L = m_LeftA || m_LeftB;
|
||||
m_merge_R = m_RightA || m_RightB;
|
||||
//both in mean does not add to result.
|
||||
if (m_merge_L && m_merge_R)
|
||||
if ( m_merge_L && m_merge_R )
|
||||
m_merge_L = m_merge_R = false;
|
||||
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_L = m_LeftA && !m_LeftB;
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_R = m_RightA && !m_RightB;
|
||||
//both in mean does not add to result.
|
||||
if (m_a_substract_b_L && m_a_substract_b_R)
|
||||
if ( m_a_substract_b_L && m_a_substract_b_R )
|
||||
m_a_substract_b_L = m_a_substract_b_R = false;
|
||||
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_L = m_LeftB && !m_LeftA;
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_R = m_RightB && !m_RightA;
|
||||
//both in mean does not add to result.
|
||||
if (m_b_substract_a_L && m_b_substract_a_R)
|
||||
if ( m_b_substract_a_L && m_b_substract_a_R )
|
||||
m_b_substract_a_L = m_b_substract_a_R = false;
|
||||
|
||||
m_intersect_L = m_LeftB && m_LeftA;
|
||||
m_intersect_R = m_RightB && m_RightA;
|
||||
//both in mean does not add to result.
|
||||
if (m_intersect_L && m_intersect_R)
|
||||
if ( m_intersect_L && m_intersect_R )
|
||||
m_intersect_L = m_intersect_R = false;
|
||||
|
||||
m_exor_L = !( (m_LeftB && m_LeftA) || (!m_LeftB && !m_LeftA) );
|
||||
m_exor_R = !( (m_RightB && m_RightA) || (!m_RightB && !m_RightA) );
|
||||
m_exor_L = !( ( m_LeftB && m_LeftA ) || ( !m_LeftB && !m_LeftA ) );
|
||||
m_exor_R = !( ( m_RightB && m_RightA ) || ( !m_RightB && !m_RightA ) );
|
||||
//both in mean does not add to result.
|
||||
if (m_exor_L && m_exor_R)
|
||||
if ( m_exor_L && m_exor_R )
|
||||
m_exor_L = m_exor_R = false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//put in direction with a_node as beginnode
|
||||
void KBoolLink::Redirect(Node* a_node)
|
||||
void KBoolLink::Redirect( Node* a_node )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (a_node != m_beginnode)
|
||||
if ( a_node != m_beginnode )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// swap the begin- and endnode of the current link
|
||||
Node* dummy = m_beginnode;
|
||||
Node * dummy = m_beginnode;
|
||||
m_beginnode = m_endnode;
|
||||
m_endnode = dummy;
|
||||
|
||||
bool swap = m_LeftA;
|
||||
m_LeftA = m_RightA;
|
||||
m_RightA= swap;
|
||||
m_RightA = swap;
|
||||
|
||||
swap = m_LeftB;
|
||||
m_LeftB = m_RightB;
|
||||
m_RightB= swap;
|
||||
m_RightB = swap;
|
||||
|
||||
swap = m_merge_L ;
|
||||
m_merge_L = m_merge_R;
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -1,19 +1,15 @@
|
|||
/*! \file ../src/lpoint.cpp
|
||||
/*! \file src/lpoint.cpp
|
||||
\brief Definition of GDSII LPoint type structure
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: lpoint.cpp,v 1.4 2005/05/24 19:13:39 titato Exp $
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: lpoint.cpp,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:22 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef __GNUG__
|
||||
#pragma implementation
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/lpoint.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/lpoint.h"
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
|
||||
// Constructors
|
||||
|
@ -24,18 +20,18 @@ LPoint::LPoint()
|
|||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LPoint::LPoint(B_INT const X, B_INT const Y)
|
||||
LPoint::LPoint( B_INT const X, B_INT const Y )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = X;
|
||||
_y = Y;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
LPoint::LPoint(LPoint* const a_point)
|
||||
LPoint::LPoint( LPoint* const a_point )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (!a_point)
|
||||
throw Bool_Engine_Error("Cannot copy a NULL Point Object.\n\nCould not create a LPoint Object.",
|
||||
"Fatal Creation Error", 0, 1);
|
||||
if ( !a_point )
|
||||
throw Bool_Engine_Error( "Cannot copy a NULL Point Object.\n\nCould not create a LPoint Object.",
|
||||
"Fatal Creation Error", 0, 1 );
|
||||
_x = a_point->_x;
|
||||
_y = a_point->_y;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -52,13 +48,13 @@ B_INT LPoint::GetY()
|
|||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void LPoint::SetX(B_INT a_point_x)
|
||||
void LPoint::SetX( B_INT a_point_x )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = a_point_x;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void LPoint::SetY(B_INT a_point_y)
|
||||
void LPoint::SetY( B_INT a_point_y )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_y = a_point_y;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -66,70 +62,70 @@ void LPoint::SetY(B_INT a_point_y)
|
|||
|
||||
LPoint LPoint::GetPoint()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return *this;
|
||||
return * this;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void LPoint::Set(const B_INT X,const B_INT Y)
|
||||
void LPoint::Set( const B_INT X, const B_INT Y )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = X;
|
||||
_y = Y;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void LPoint::Set(const LPoint &a_point)
|
||||
void LPoint::Set( const LPoint &a_point )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = a_point._x;
|
||||
_y =a_point._y;
|
||||
_y = a_point._y;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool LPoint::Equal(const LPoint a_point, B_INT Marge)
|
||||
bool LPoint::Equal( const LPoint a_point, B_INT Marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
B_INT delta_x, delta_y;
|
||||
|
||||
delta_x = babs((_x - a_point._x));
|
||||
delta_y = babs((_y - a_point._y));
|
||||
delta_x = babs( ( _x - a_point._x ) );
|
||||
delta_y = babs( ( _y - a_point._y ) );
|
||||
|
||||
if ((delta_x <= Marge) && (delta_y <= Marge))
|
||||
if ( ( delta_x <= Marge ) && ( delta_y <= Marge ) )
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
else
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bool LPoint::Equal(const B_INT X, const B_INT Y, B_INT Marge)
|
||||
bool LPoint::Equal( const B_INT X, const B_INT Y, B_INT Marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return (bool)((babs(_x - X) <= Marge) && (babs(_y - Y) <= Marge));
|
||||
return ( bool )( ( babs( _x - X ) <= Marge ) && ( babs( _y - Y ) <= Marge ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool LPoint::ShorterThan(const LPoint a_point, B_INT Marge)
|
||||
bool LPoint::ShorterThan( const LPoint a_point, B_INT Marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
double a,b;
|
||||
a = (double) (a_point._x - _x);
|
||||
a*= a;
|
||||
b = (double) (a_point._y - _y);
|
||||
b*= b;
|
||||
double a, b;
|
||||
a = ( double ) ( a_point._x - _x );
|
||||
a *= a;
|
||||
b = ( double ) ( a_point._y - _y );
|
||||
b *= b;
|
||||
|
||||
return (bool) ( (a+b) <= Marge*Marge ? true : false ) ;
|
||||
return ( bool ) ( ( a + b ) <= Marge * Marge ? true : false ) ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
bool LPoint::ShorterThan(const B_INT X, const B_INT Y, B_INT Marge)
|
||||
bool LPoint::ShorterThan( const B_INT X, const B_INT Y, B_INT Marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
double a,b;
|
||||
a = (double) (X - _x);
|
||||
a*= a;
|
||||
b = (double) (Y - _y);
|
||||
b*= b;
|
||||
double a, b;
|
||||
a = ( double ) ( X - _x );
|
||||
a *= a;
|
||||
b = ( double ) ( Y - _y );
|
||||
b *= b;
|
||||
|
||||
return (bool) ( a+b <= Marge*Marge ? true : false ) ;
|
||||
return ( bool ) ( a + b <= Marge * Marge ? true : false ) ;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// overload the assign (=) operator
|
||||
// usage : a_point = another_point;
|
||||
|
||||
LPoint &LPoint::operator=(const LPoint &other_point)
|
||||
LPoint &LPoint::operator=( const LPoint &other_point )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = other_point._x;
|
||||
_y = other_point._y;
|
||||
|
@ -140,7 +136,7 @@ LPoint &LPoint::operator=(const LPoint &other_point)
|
|||
// overload the + operator
|
||||
// usage : a_point = point1 + point2;
|
||||
|
||||
LPoint &LPoint::operator+(const LPoint &other_point)
|
||||
LPoint &LPoint::operator+( const LPoint &other_point )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x += other_point._x;
|
||||
_y += other_point._y;
|
||||
|
@ -152,7 +148,7 @@ LPoint &LPoint::operator+(const LPoint &other_point)
|
|||
// overload the - operator
|
||||
// usage : a_point = point1 - point2;
|
||||
|
||||
LPoint &LPoint::operator-(const LPoint &other_point)
|
||||
LPoint &LPoint::operator-( const LPoint &other_point )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x -= other_point._x;
|
||||
_y -= other_point._y;
|
||||
|
@ -163,7 +159,7 @@ LPoint &LPoint::operator-(const LPoint &other_point)
|
|||
// overload the * operator
|
||||
// usage: a_point = point1 * 100;
|
||||
|
||||
LPoint &LPoint::operator*(int factor)
|
||||
LPoint &LPoint::operator*( int factor )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x *= factor;
|
||||
_y *= factor;
|
||||
|
@ -174,7 +170,7 @@ LPoint &LPoint::operator*(int factor)
|
|||
// overload the / operator
|
||||
// usage: a_point = point1 / 100;
|
||||
|
||||
LPoint &LPoint::operator/(int factor)
|
||||
LPoint &LPoint::operator/( int factor )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x /= factor;
|
||||
_y /= factor;
|
||||
|
@ -185,18 +181,18 @@ LPoint &LPoint::operator/(int factor)
|
|||
// overload the compare (==) operator
|
||||
// usage: if (point1 == point2) { };
|
||||
|
||||
int LPoint::operator==(const LPoint &other_point) const
|
||||
int LPoint::operator==( const LPoint &other_point ) const
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ((other_point._x == _x) && (other_point._y == _y));
|
||||
return ( ( other_point._x == _x ) && ( other_point._y == _y ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
// overload the diffrent (!=) operator
|
||||
// usage: if (point1 != point2) { };
|
||||
|
||||
int LPoint::operator!=(const LPoint &other_point) const
|
||||
int LPoint::operator!=( const LPoint &other_point ) const
|
||||
{
|
||||
return ((other_point._x != _x) || (other_point._y != _y));
|
||||
return ( ( other_point._x != _x ) || ( other_point._y != _y ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
|
|||
# makefile.include for kbool
|
||||
.cpp.o:
|
||||
g++ -c -Wall -O2 -I../include -o $@ $*.cpp
|
||||
|
||||
OBJECTS =\
|
||||
booleng.o\
|
||||
graph.o\
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -1,57 +1,54 @@
|
|||
/*! \file ../src/node.cpp
|
||||
/*! \file src/node.cpp
|
||||
\brief Holds a GDSII node structure
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: node.cpp,v 1.7 2005/06/17 23:01:03 kbluck Exp $
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: node.cpp,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:22 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
#ifdef __GNUG__
|
||||
#pragma implementation
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/node.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/link.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/line.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/node.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/link.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/line.h"
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
|
||||
//this here is to initialize the static iterator of node
|
||||
//with NOLIST constructor
|
||||
//TDLI<KBoolLink> Node::_linkiter=TDLI<KBoolLink>(_GC);
|
||||
|
||||
Node::Node(Bool_Engine* GC) : LPoint(0,0)
|
||||
Node::Node( Bool_Engine* GC ) : LPoint( 0, 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC=GC;
|
||||
_linklist=new DL_List<void*>();
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
_linklist = new DL_List<void*>();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Node::Node(B_INT const X, B_INT const Y, Bool_Engine* GC) : LPoint(X,Y)
|
||||
Node::Node( B_INT const X, B_INT const Y, Bool_Engine* GC ) : LPoint( X, Y )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC=GC;
|
||||
_linklist=new DL_List<void*>();
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
_linklist = new DL_List<void*>();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
Node::Node(LPoint* const a_point, Bool_Engine* GC) : LPoint(a_point)
|
||||
Node::Node( LPoint* const a_point, Bool_Engine* GC ) : LPoint( a_point )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC=GC;
|
||||
_linklist=new DL_List<void*>();
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
_linklist = new DL_List<void*>();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//Node::Node(Node * const other) : LPoint(other)
|
||||
Node::Node(Node * const other, Bool_Engine* GC)
|
||||
Node::Node( Node * const other, Bool_Engine* GC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC=GC;
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
_x = other->_x;
|
||||
_y = other->_y;
|
||||
_linklist=new DL_List<void*>();
|
||||
_linklist = new DL_List<void*>();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
Node& Node::operator=(const Node &other_node)
|
||||
Node& Node::operator=( const Node &other_node )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x = other_node._x;
|
||||
_y = other_node._y;
|
||||
|
@ -62,10 +59,10 @@ Node& Node::operator=(const Node &other_node)
|
|||
|
||||
// x and y of the point will be rounded to the nearest
|
||||
// xnew=N*grid and ynew=N*grid
|
||||
void Node::RoundInt(B_INT grid)
|
||||
void Node::RoundInt( B_INT grid )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_x=(B_INT) floor((_x + grid * 0.5) / grid) * grid;
|
||||
_y=(B_INT) floor((_y + grid * 0.5) / grid) * grid;
|
||||
_x = ( B_INT ) floor( ( _x + grid * 0.5 ) / grid ) * grid;
|
||||
_y = ( B_INT ) floor( ( _y + grid * 0.5 ) / grid ) * grid;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
Node::~Node()
|
||||
|
@ -78,26 +75,26 @@ DL_List<void*>* Node::GetLinklist()
|
|||
return _linklist;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Node::AddLink(KBoolLink *a_link)
|
||||
void Node::AddLink( KBoolLink *a_link )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// assert(a_link);
|
||||
_linklist->insbegin(a_link);
|
||||
_linklist->insbegin( a_link );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
KBoolLink* Node::GetIncomingLink()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (((KBoolLink*)_linklist->headitem())->GetEndNode() == this)
|
||||
return (KBoolLink*)_linklist->headitem();
|
||||
if ( ( ( KBoolLink* )_linklist->headitem() )->GetEndNode() == this )
|
||||
return ( KBoolLink* )_linklist->headitem();
|
||||
else
|
||||
return (KBoolLink*)_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
return ( KBoolLink* )_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
KBoolLink* Node::GetOutgoingLink()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (((KBoolLink*)_linklist->headitem())->GetBeginNode() == this)
|
||||
return (KBoolLink*)_linklist->headitem();
|
||||
if ( ( ( KBoolLink* )_linklist->headitem() )->GetBeginNode() == this )
|
||||
return ( KBoolLink* )_linklist->headitem();
|
||||
else
|
||||
return (KBoolLink*)_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
return ( KBoolLink* )_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//
|
||||
|
@ -108,45 +105,45 @@ int Node::GetNumberOfLinks()
|
|||
return _linklist->count();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
KBoolLink* Node::GetOtherLink(KBoolLink* prev)
|
||||
KBoolLink* Node::GetOtherLink( KBoolLink* prev )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (prev==(KBoolLink*)_linklist->headitem())
|
||||
return (KBoolLink*)_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
if (prev==(KBoolLink*)_linklist->tailitem())
|
||||
return (KBoolLink*)_linklist->headitem();
|
||||
if ( prev == ( KBoolLink* )_linklist->headitem() )
|
||||
return ( KBoolLink* )_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
if ( prev == ( KBoolLink* )_linklist->tailitem() )
|
||||
return ( KBoolLink* )_linklist->headitem();
|
||||
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
int Node::Merge(Node *other)
|
||||
int Node::Merge( Node *other )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (this==other) //they are already merged dummy
|
||||
if ( this == other ) //they are already merged dummy
|
||||
return 0;
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach(_linklist);
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
int Counter;
|
||||
// used to delete Iterator on other->_linklist
|
||||
// otherwise there can't be a takeover, because for takeover there can't
|
||||
// be an iterator on other->_linklist;
|
||||
{
|
||||
TDLI<KBoolLink> Iother(other->_linklist);
|
||||
TDLI<KBoolLink> Iother( other->_linklist );
|
||||
KBoolLink* temp;
|
||||
|
||||
Counter = Iother.count();
|
||||
|
||||
Iother.tohead();
|
||||
while (!Iother.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !Iother.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
temp=Iother.item();
|
||||
temp = Iother.item();
|
||||
//need to test both nodes because it may be a zero length link
|
||||
if (temp->GetEndNode()==other)
|
||||
temp->SetEndNode(this);
|
||||
if (temp->GetBeginNode()==other)
|
||||
temp->SetBeginNode(this);
|
||||
if ( temp->GetEndNode() == other )
|
||||
temp->SetEndNode( this );
|
||||
if ( temp->GetBeginNode() == other )
|
||||
temp->SetBeginNode( this );
|
||||
Iother++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->takeover(&Iother);
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->takeover( &Iother );
|
||||
}
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -156,12 +153,12 @@ int Node::Merge(Node *other)
|
|||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
void Node::RemoveLink(KBoolLink *a_link)
|
||||
void Node::RemoveLink( KBoolLink *a_link )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// assert(a_link);
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach(_linklist);
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
|
||||
if (_GC->_linkiter->toitem(a_link)) // find the link
|
||||
if ( _GC->_linkiter->toitem( a_link ) ) // find the link
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->remove();
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -175,45 +172,45 @@ void Node::RemoveLink(KBoolLink *a_link)
|
|||
// output: -
|
||||
// return: true if points can be simplified
|
||||
// false if points can't be simplified
|
||||
bool Node::Simplify(Node *First, Node *Second, B_INT Marge)
|
||||
bool Node::Simplify( Node *First, Node *Second, B_INT Marge )
|
||||
{
|
||||
double distance=0;
|
||||
double distance = 0;
|
||||
|
||||
// The first and second point are a zero line, if so we can
|
||||
// make a line between the first and third point
|
||||
if (First->Equal(Second,Marge))
|
||||
if ( First->Equal( Second, Marge ) )
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
|
||||
// Are the first and third point equal, if so
|
||||
// we can delete the second point
|
||||
if (First->Equal(this, Marge))
|
||||
if ( First->Equal( this, Marge ) )
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
|
||||
// Used tmp_link.set here, because the link may not be linked in the graph,
|
||||
// because the point of the graphs are used, after use of the line we have
|
||||
//to set the link to zero so the nodes will not be destructed by exit of the function
|
||||
KBoolLink tmp_link(_GC);
|
||||
tmp_link.Set(First,Second);
|
||||
KBoolLine tmp_line(_GC);
|
||||
tmp_line.Set(&tmp_link);
|
||||
KBoolLink tmp_link( _GC );
|
||||
tmp_link.Set( First, Second );
|
||||
KBoolLine tmp_line( _GC );
|
||||
tmp_line.Set( &tmp_link );
|
||||
|
||||
// If third point is on the same line which is made from the first
|
||||
// and second point then we can delete the second point
|
||||
if (tmp_line.PointOnLine(this,distance, (double) Marge) == ON_AREA)
|
||||
if ( tmp_line.PointOnLine( this, distance, ( double ) Marge ) == ON_AREA )
|
||||
{
|
||||
tmp_link.Set(NULL,NULL);
|
||||
tmp_link.Set( NULL, NULL );
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
//
|
||||
//
|
||||
tmp_link.Set(Second,this);
|
||||
tmp_line.Set(&tmp_link);
|
||||
if (tmp_line.PointOnLine(First,distance, (double) Marge) == ON_AREA)
|
||||
tmp_link.Set( Second, this );
|
||||
tmp_line.Set( &tmp_link );
|
||||
if ( tmp_line.PointOnLine( First, distance, ( double ) Marge ) == ON_AREA )
|
||||
{
|
||||
tmp_link.Set(NULL,NULL);
|
||||
tmp_link.Set( NULL, NULL );
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
tmp_link.Set(NULL,NULL);
|
||||
tmp_link.Set( NULL, NULL );
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -225,32 +222,32 @@ KBoolLink* Node::GetNextLink()
|
|||
// assert (Aantal != 0);
|
||||
|
||||
// there is one link, so there is no previous link
|
||||
if (Aantal == 1)
|
||||
if ( Aantal == 1 )
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
int Marked_Counter = 0;
|
||||
KBoolLink *the_link = NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
// count the marked links
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach(_linklist);
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->tohead();
|
||||
while (!_GC->_linkiter->hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_GC->_linkiter->hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (_GC->_linkiter->item()->IsMarked())
|
||||
if ( _GC->_linkiter->item()->IsMarked() )
|
||||
Marked_Counter++;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (!the_link)
|
||||
if ( !the_link )
|
||||
the_link = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
}
|
||||
(*_GC->_linkiter)++;
|
||||
( *_GC->_linkiter )++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
if (Aantal - Marked_Counter != 1)
|
||||
if ( Aantal - Marked_Counter != 1 )
|
||||
// there arent two unmarked links
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (the_link->GetBeginNode() == this)
|
||||
if ( the_link->GetBeginNode() == this )
|
||||
return the_link;
|
||||
else
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
|
@ -261,7 +258,7 @@ KBoolLink* Node::GetNextLink()
|
|||
KBoolLink* Node::GetPrevLink()
|
||||
{
|
||||
int Aantal;
|
||||
if (!_linklist)
|
||||
if ( !_linklist )
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
Aantal = _linklist->count();
|
||||
|
@ -269,33 +266,33 @@ KBoolLink* Node::GetPrevLink()
|
|||
// assert (Aantal != 0);
|
||||
|
||||
// there is one link, so there is no previous link
|
||||
if (Aantal == 1)
|
||||
if ( Aantal == 1 )
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
int Marked_Counter = 0;
|
||||
KBoolLink *the_link = NULL;
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach(_linklist);
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
// count the marked links
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->tohead();
|
||||
while (!_GC->_linkiter->hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_GC->_linkiter->hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (_GC->_linkiter->item()->IsMarked())
|
||||
if ( _GC->_linkiter->item()->IsMarked() )
|
||||
Marked_Counter++;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (!the_link)
|
||||
if ( !the_link )
|
||||
the_link = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
}
|
||||
(*_GC->_linkiter)++;
|
||||
( *_GC->_linkiter )++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
if (Aantal - Marked_Counter != 1)
|
||||
if ( Aantal - Marked_Counter != 1 )
|
||||
// there arent two unmarked links
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (the_link->GetEndNode() == this)
|
||||
if ( the_link->GetEndNode() == this )
|
||||
return the_link;
|
||||
else
|
||||
return NULL;
|
||||
|
@ -334,26 +331,26 @@ bool Node::SameSides( KBoolLink* const prev , KBoolLink* const link, BOOL_OP ope
|
|||
// on the node get the link
|
||||
// is the most right or left one
|
||||
// This function is used to collect the simple graphs from a graph
|
||||
KBoolLink* Node::GetMost( KBoolLink* const prev ,LinkStatus whatside, BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
KBoolLink* Node::GetMost( KBoolLink* const prev , LinkStatus whatside, BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
KBoolLink *reserve=0;
|
||||
KBoolLink *Result = NULL,*link;
|
||||
Node* prevbegin = prev->GetOther(this);
|
||||
KBoolLink * reserve = 0;
|
||||
KBoolLink *Result = NULL, *link;
|
||||
Node* prevbegin = prev->GetOther( this );
|
||||
|
||||
if (_linklist->count() == 2) // only two links to this node take the one != prev
|
||||
if ( _linklist->count() == 2 ) // only two links to this node take the one != prev
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( (link = (KBoolLink*)_linklist->headitem()) == prev ) //this is NOT the one to go on
|
||||
link = (KBoolLink*)_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
if (!link->BeenHere() && SameSides( prev, link, operation ) )
|
||||
if ( ( link = ( KBoolLink* )_linklist->headitem() ) == prev ) //this is NOT the one to go on
|
||||
link = ( KBoolLink* )_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
if ( !link->BeenHere() && SameSides( prev, link, operation ) )
|
||||
//we are back where we started (bin is true) return Null
|
||||
return link;
|
||||
return(0);
|
||||
return( 0 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach(_linklist);
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->tohead();
|
||||
//more then 2 links to the Node
|
||||
while(!_GC->_linkiter->hitroot())
|
||||
while( !_GC->_linkiter->hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
link = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
if ( !link->BeenHere() &&
|
||||
|
@ -361,30 +358,30 @@ KBoolLink* Node::GetMost( KBoolLink* const prev ,LinkStatus whatside, BOOL_OP op
|
|||
link != prev //should be set to bin already
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (prevbegin == link->GetOther(this) )//pointers equal
|
||||
if ( prevbegin == link->GetOther( this ) )//pointers equal
|
||||
//we are going back in the same direction on a parallel link
|
||||
//only take this possibility if nothing else is possible
|
||||
reserve = link;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ //this link is in a different direction
|
||||
if (!Result)
|
||||
if ( !Result )
|
||||
Result = link; //first one found sofar
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (prev->PointOnCorner(Result, link) == whatside )
|
||||
if ( prev->PointOnCorner( Result, link ) == whatside )
|
||||
//more to the whatside than take this one
|
||||
Result = link;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
(*_GC->_linkiter)++;
|
||||
( *_GC->_linkiter )++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// if there is a next link found return it
|
||||
// else if a parallel link is found return that one
|
||||
// else return NULL
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
return ((Result) ? Result : reserve);
|
||||
return ( ( Result ) ? Result : reserve );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// on the node get the link
|
||||
|
@ -392,24 +389,24 @@ KBoolLink* Node::GetMost( KBoolLink* const prev ,LinkStatus whatside, BOOL_OP op
|
|||
// This function is used to collect the simple graphs from a graph
|
||||
KBoolLink* Node::GetMostHole( KBoolLink* const prev, LinkStatus whatside, BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
KBoolLink *reserve=0;
|
||||
KBoolLink *Result=NULL,*link;
|
||||
Node* prevbegin = prev->GetOther(this);
|
||||
KBoolLink * reserve = 0;
|
||||
KBoolLink *Result = NULL, *link;
|
||||
Node* prevbegin = prev->GetOther( this );
|
||||
|
||||
if (_linklist->count() == 2) // only two links to this node take the one != prev
|
||||
if ( _linklist->count() == 2 ) // only two links to this node take the one != prev
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( (link = (KBoolLink*)_linklist->headitem()) == prev ) //this is NOT the one to go on
|
||||
link = (KBoolLink*)_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
if ( ( link = ( KBoolLink* )_linklist->headitem() ) == prev ) //this is NOT the one to go on
|
||||
link = ( KBoolLink* )_linklist->tailitem();
|
||||
if ( link->GetHole() && !link->GetHoleLink() && !link->BeenHere() && SameSides( prev, link, operation ) )
|
||||
//we are back where we started (bin is true) return Null
|
||||
return link;
|
||||
return(0);
|
||||
return( 0 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach(_linklist);
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->tohead();
|
||||
//more then 2 links to the Node
|
||||
while(!_GC->_linkiter->hitroot())
|
||||
while( !_GC->_linkiter->hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
link = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
if ( !link->BeenHere() &&
|
||||
|
@ -419,95 +416,95 @@ KBoolLink* Node::GetMostHole( KBoolLink* const prev, LinkStatus whatside, BOOL_O
|
|||
link != prev //should be set to bin already
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (prevbegin == link->GetOther(this) )//pointers equal
|
||||
if ( prevbegin == link->GetOther( this ) )//pointers equal
|
||||
//we are going back in the same direction on a parallel link
|
||||
//only take this possibility if nothing else is possible
|
||||
reserve = link;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ //this link is in a different direction
|
||||
if (!Result)
|
||||
if ( !Result )
|
||||
Result = link; //first one found sofar
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (prev->PointOnCorner(Result, link) == whatside )
|
||||
if ( prev->PointOnCorner( Result, link ) == whatside )
|
||||
//more to the whatside than take this one
|
||||
Result = link;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
(*_GC->_linkiter)++;
|
||||
( *_GC->_linkiter )++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// if there is a next link found return it
|
||||
// else if a parallel link is found return that one
|
||||
// else return NULL
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
return ((Result) ? Result : reserve);
|
||||
return ( ( Result ) ? Result : reserve );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// this function gets the highest not flat link
|
||||
KBoolLink* Node::GetHoleLink( KBoolLink* const prev, bool checkbin, BOOL_OP operation )
|
||||
{
|
||||
KBoolLink *Result=NULL,*link;
|
||||
KBoolLink * Result = NULL, *link;
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach(_linklist);
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
|
||||
for(_GC->_linkiter->tohead();!_GC->_linkiter->hitroot();(*_GC->_linkiter)++)
|
||||
for( _GC->_linkiter->tohead();!_GC->_linkiter->hitroot();( *_GC->_linkiter )++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
link=_GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
link = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
if ( link->GetHoleLink() &&
|
||||
( !checkbin || ( checkbin && !link->BeenHere()) ) &&
|
||||
( !checkbin || ( checkbin && !link->BeenHere() ) ) &&
|
||||
SameSides( prev, link, operation )
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
Result=link;
|
||||
Result = link;
|
||||
break;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
return (Result);
|
||||
return ( Result );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// this function gets the highest not flat link
|
||||
KBoolLink* Node::GetNotFlat()
|
||||
{
|
||||
KBoolLink *Result=NULL,*link;
|
||||
KBoolLink * Result = NULL, *link;
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach(_linklist);
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
|
||||
double tangold = 0.0;
|
||||
double tangnew = 0.0;
|
||||
|
||||
for(_GC->_linkiter->tohead();!_GC->_linkiter->hitroot();(*_GC->_linkiter)++)
|
||||
for( _GC->_linkiter->tohead();!_GC->_linkiter->hitroot();( *_GC->_linkiter )++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
link=_GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
if (!_GC->_linkiter->item()->BeenHere())
|
||||
link = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
if ( !_GC->_linkiter->item()->BeenHere() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
B_INT dx=link->GetOther(this)->GetX()-_x;
|
||||
B_INT dy=link->GetOther(this)->GetY()-_y;
|
||||
if (dx!=0)
|
||||
B_INT dx = link->GetOther( this )->GetX() - _x;
|
||||
B_INT dy = link->GetOther( this )->GetY() - _y;
|
||||
if ( dx != 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
tangnew=fabs( (double) dy / (double) dx );
|
||||
tangnew = fabs( ( double ) dy / ( double ) dx );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
tangnew=MAXDOUBLE;
|
||||
tangnew = MAXDOUBLE;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
if (!Result)
|
||||
if ( !Result )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//this link is in a different direction
|
||||
Result=link; //first one found sofar
|
||||
tangold=tangnew;
|
||||
Result = link; //first one found sofar
|
||||
tangold = tangnew;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if(tangnew < tangold)
|
||||
if( tangnew < tangold )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//this one is higher (more horizontal) then the old Result
|
||||
Result=link;
|
||||
tangold=tangnew;
|
||||
Result = link;
|
||||
tangold = tangnew;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -517,67 +514,67 @@ KBoolLink* Node::GetNotFlat()
|
|||
// else if a parallel link is found return that one
|
||||
// else return NULL
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
return (Result);
|
||||
return ( Result );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// on the node get the link that is not BIN
|
||||
// and that has the same graphnumber and is in same direction
|
||||
KBoolLink *Node::Follow(KBoolLink* const prev )
|
||||
KBoolLink *Node::Follow( KBoolLink* const prev )
|
||||
{
|
||||
KBoolLink *temp;
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach(_linklist);
|
||||
KBoolLink * temp;
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->tohead();
|
||||
while(!_GC->_linkiter->hitroot())
|
||||
while( !_GC->_linkiter->hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (( _GC->_linkiter->item() != prev ) &&
|
||||
( !_GC->_linkiter->item()->BeenHere()) &&
|
||||
( _GC->_linkiter->item()->GetGraphNum() == prev->GetGraphNum()) &&
|
||||
if ( ( _GC->_linkiter->item() != prev ) &&
|
||||
( !_GC->_linkiter->item()->BeenHere() ) &&
|
||||
( _GC->_linkiter->item()->GetGraphNum() == prev->GetGraphNum() ) &&
|
||||
(
|
||||
( (prev->GetEndNode() == this) &&
|
||||
(_GC->_linkiter->item()->GetEndNode() !=this)
|
||||
( ( prev->GetEndNode() == this ) &&
|
||||
( _GC->_linkiter->item()->GetEndNode() != this )
|
||||
)
|
||||
||
|
||||
( (prev->GetBeginNode() == this) &&
|
||||
(_GC->_linkiter->item()->GetBeginNode() !=this)
|
||||
( ( prev->GetBeginNode() == this ) &&
|
||||
( _GC->_linkiter->item()->GetBeginNode() != this )
|
||||
)
|
||||
)
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
temp=_GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
temp = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
return(temp);
|
||||
return( temp );
|
||||
}
|
||||
(*_GC->_linkiter)++;
|
||||
( *_GC->_linkiter )++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
return (0);
|
||||
return ( 0 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// this function gets the highest (other node) link ascending from the node
|
||||
// that has the bin flag set as the argument binset
|
||||
// if no such link exists return 0
|
||||
KBoolLink* Node::GetBinHighest(bool binset)
|
||||
KBoolLink* Node::GetBinHighest( bool binset )
|
||||
{
|
||||
KBoolLink *Result=NULL,*link;
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach(_linklist);
|
||||
KBoolLink * Result = NULL, *link;
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Attach( _linklist );
|
||||
|
||||
double tangold = 0.0;
|
||||
double tangnew = 0.0;
|
||||
|
||||
for(_GC->_linkiter->tohead();!_GC->_linkiter->hitroot();(*_GC->_linkiter)++)
|
||||
for( _GC->_linkiter->tohead();!_GC->_linkiter->hitroot();( *_GC->_linkiter )++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
link=_GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
if (_GC->_linkiter->item()->BeenHere() == binset)
|
||||
link = _GC->_linkiter->item();
|
||||
if ( _GC->_linkiter->item()->BeenHere() == binset )
|
||||
{
|
||||
B_INT dx=link->GetOther(this)->GetX()-_x;
|
||||
B_INT dy=link->GetOther(this)->GetY()-_y;
|
||||
if (dx!=0)
|
||||
B_INT dx = link->GetOther( this )->GetX() - _x;
|
||||
B_INT dy = link->GetOther( this )->GetY() - _y;
|
||||
if ( dx != 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
tangnew = (double) dy / (double) dx;
|
||||
tangnew = ( double ) dy / ( double ) dx;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else if (dy > 0)
|
||||
else if ( dy > 0 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
tangnew = MAXDOUBLE;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -586,14 +583,14 @@ KBoolLink* Node::GetBinHighest(bool binset)
|
|||
tangnew = -MAXDOUBLE;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
if (!Result)
|
||||
if ( !Result )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Result = link; //first one found sofar
|
||||
tangold = tangnew;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if(tangnew > tangold)
|
||||
if( tangnew > tangold )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//this one is higher then the old Result
|
||||
Result = link;
|
||||
|
@ -606,7 +603,7 @@ KBoolLink* Node::GetBinHighest(bool binset)
|
|||
// if there is a link found return it
|
||||
// else return NULL
|
||||
_GC->_linkiter->Detach();
|
||||
return (Result);
|
||||
return ( Result );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -1,20 +1,16 @@
|
|||
/*! \file ../src/record.cpp
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda or Julian Smart
|
||||
/*! \file src/record.cpp
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda or Julian Smart
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: record.cpp,v 1.5 2005/05/24 19:13:39 titato Exp $
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: record.cpp,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:22 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef __GNUG__
|
||||
#pragma implementation
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/record.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/node.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/record.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/node.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include <stdlib.h>
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
|
@ -33,8 +29,7 @@
|
|||
//}
|
||||
|
||||
Record::~Record()
|
||||
{
|
||||
}
|
||||
{}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//void* Record::operator new(size_t size)
|
||||
|
@ -69,60 +64,60 @@ Record::~Record()
|
|||
// }
|
||||
//}
|
||||
|
||||
Record::Record(KBoolLink* link,Bool_Engine* GC)
|
||||
:_line(GC)
|
||||
Record::Record( KBoolLink* link, Bool_Engine* GC )
|
||||
: _line( GC )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC=GC;
|
||||
_dir=GO_RIGHT;
|
||||
_a=0;
|
||||
_b=0;
|
||||
_line.Set(link);
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
_dir = GO_RIGHT;
|
||||
_a = 0;
|
||||
_b = 0;
|
||||
_line.Set( link );
|
||||
_line.CalculateLineParameters();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
//when the dimensions of a link for a record changes, its line parameters need to be recalculated
|
||||
void Record::SetNewLink(KBoolLink* link)
|
||||
void Record::SetNewLink( KBoolLink* link )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_line.Set(link);
|
||||
_line.Set( link );
|
||||
_line.CalculateLineParameters();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//for beams calculate the ysp on the low scanline
|
||||
void Record::Calc_Ysp(Node* low)
|
||||
void Record::Calc_Ysp( Node* low )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ((LNK->GetEndNode() == low) || (LNK->GetBeginNode() == low))
|
||||
if ( ( LNK->GetEndNode() == low ) || ( LNK->GetBeginNode() == low ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_ysp=low->GetY();
|
||||
_ysp = low->GetY();
|
||||
return;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
if (LNK->GetEndNode()->GetX() == LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetX())
|
||||
_ysp=low->GetY(); //flatlink only in flatbeams
|
||||
else if (LNK->GetEndNode()->GetX() == low->GetX())
|
||||
_ysp=LNK->GetEndNode()->GetY();
|
||||
else if (LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetX() == low->GetX())
|
||||
_ysp=LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetY();
|
||||
if ( LNK->GetEndNode()->GetX() == LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetX() )
|
||||
_ysp = low->GetY(); //flatlink only in flatbeams
|
||||
else if ( LNK->GetEndNode()->GetX() == low->GetX() )
|
||||
_ysp = LNK->GetEndNode()->GetY();
|
||||
else if ( LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetX() == low->GetX() )
|
||||
_ysp = LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetY();
|
||||
else
|
||||
_ysp=_line.Calculate_Y_from_X(low->GetX());
|
||||
_ysp = _line.Calculate_Y_from_X( low->GetX() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//to set the _dir for new links in the beam
|
||||
void Record::Set_Flags()
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (LNK->GetEndNode()->GetX()==LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetX()) //flatlink ?
|
||||
if ( LNK->GetEndNode()->GetX() == LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetX() ) //flatlink ?
|
||||
{ //only happens in flat beams
|
||||
if (LNK->GetEndNode()->GetY() < LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetY())
|
||||
_dir=GO_RIGHT;
|
||||
if ( LNK->GetEndNode()->GetY() < LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetY() )
|
||||
_dir = GO_RIGHT;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_dir=GO_LEFT;
|
||||
_dir = GO_LEFT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (LNK->GetEndNode()->GetX() > LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetX())
|
||||
_dir=GO_RIGHT;
|
||||
if ( LNK->GetEndNode()->GetX() > LNK->GetBeginNode()->GetX() )
|
||||
_dir = GO_RIGHT;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_dir=GO_LEFT;
|
||||
_dir = GO_LEFT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -136,112 +131,112 @@ B_INT Record::Ysp()
|
|||
return _ysp;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void Record::SetYsp(B_INT ysp)
|
||||
void Record::SetYsp( B_INT ysp )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_ysp=ysp;
|
||||
_ysp = ysp;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
DIRECTION Record::Direction()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return DIRECTION(_dir);
|
||||
return DIRECTION( _dir );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool Record::Calc_Left_Right(Record* record_above_me)
|
||||
bool Record::Calc_Left_Right( Record* record_above_me )
|
||||
{
|
||||
bool par=false;
|
||||
bool par = false;
|
||||
|
||||
if (!record_above_me) //null if no record above
|
||||
{ _a=0;_b=0; }
|
||||
if ( !record_above_me ) //null if no record above
|
||||
{ _a = 0;_b = 0; }
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
_a=record_above_me->_a;
|
||||
_b=record_above_me->_b;
|
||||
_a = record_above_me->_a;
|
||||
_b = record_above_me->_b;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
switch (_dir&1)
|
||||
switch ( _dir & 1 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case GO_LEFT : if (LNK->Group() == GROUP_A)
|
||||
case GO_LEFT : if ( LNK->Group() == GROUP_A )
|
||||
{
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA((bool)(_a>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
|
||||
if (_GC->GetWindingRule())
|
||||
if ( _GC->GetWindingRule() )
|
||||
LNK->GetInc() ? _a++ : _a--;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ //ALTERNATE
|
||||
if (_a)
|
||||
_a=0;
|
||||
if ( _a )
|
||||
_a = 0;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_a=1;
|
||||
_a = 1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA((bool)(_a>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA((bool)(_a > 0));
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA((bool)(_a>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
|
||||
if (_GC->GetWindingRule())
|
||||
if ( _GC->GetWindingRule() )
|
||||
LNK->GetInc() ? _b++ : _b--;
|
||||
else //ALTERNATE
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (_b)
|
||||
_b=0;
|
||||
if ( _b )
|
||||
_b = 0;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_b=1;
|
||||
_b = 1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case GO_RIGHT : if (LNK->Group() == GROUP_A)
|
||||
case GO_RIGHT : if ( LNK->Group() == GROUP_A )
|
||||
{
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA((bool)(_a>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
|
||||
if (_GC->GetWindingRule())
|
||||
if ( _GC->GetWindingRule() )
|
||||
LNK->GetInc() ? _a++ : _a--;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ //ALTERNATE
|
||||
if (_a)
|
||||
_a=0;
|
||||
if ( _a )
|
||||
_a = 0;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_a=1;
|
||||
_a = 1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA((bool)(_a>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA((bool)(_a>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA((bool)(_a>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetRightA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftA( ( bool )( _a > 0 ) );
|
||||
LNK->SetLeftB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
|
||||
if (_GC->GetWindingRule())
|
||||
if ( _GC->GetWindingRule() )
|
||||
LNK->GetInc() ? _b++ : _b--;
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ //ALTERNATE
|
||||
if (_b)
|
||||
_b=0;
|
||||
if ( _b )
|
||||
_b = 0;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_b=1;
|
||||
_b = 1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB((bool)(_b>0));
|
||||
LNK->SetRightB( ( bool )( _b > 0 ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
break;
|
||||
default : _GC->error("Undefined Direction of link","function IScanBeam::Calc_Set_Left_Right()");
|
||||
default : _GC->error( "Undefined Direction of link", "function IScanBeam::Calc_Set_Left_Right()" );
|
||||
break;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//THE NEXT WILL WORK for MOST windingrule polygons,
|
||||
//even when not taking into acount windingrule
|
||||
// not all
|
||||
/*
|
||||
/*
|
||||
switch (_dir&1)
|
||||
{
|
||||
case GO_LEFT : if (LNK->Group() == GROUP_A)
|
||||
|
@ -301,57 +296,57 @@ bool Record::Calc_Left_Right(Record* record_above_me)
|
|||
default : _messagehandler->error("Undefined Direction of link","function IScanBeam::Calc_Set_Left_Right()");
|
||||
break;
|
||||
}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
*/
|
||||
//if the records are parallel (same begin/endnodes)
|
||||
//the above link a/b flag are adjusted to the current a/b depth
|
||||
if (record_above_me && Equal(record_above_me))
|
||||
if ( record_above_me && Equal( record_above_me ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
par=true;
|
||||
par = true;
|
||||
LNK->Mark();
|
||||
record_above_me->_a=_a;
|
||||
record_above_me->_b=_b;
|
||||
if (Direction()== GO_LEFT)
|
||||
record_above_me->_a = _a;
|
||||
record_above_me->_b = _b;
|
||||
if ( Direction() == GO_LEFT )
|
||||
{
|
||||
//set the bottom side of the above link
|
||||
if (record_above_me->Direction()== GO_LEFT)
|
||||
if ( record_above_me->Direction() == GO_LEFT )
|
||||
{
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetLeftA(LNK->GetLeftA());
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetLeftB(LNK->GetLeftB());
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetLeftA( LNK->GetLeftA() );
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetLeftB( LNK->GetLeftB() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetRightA(LNK->GetLeftA());
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetRightB(LNK->GetLeftB());
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetRightA( LNK->GetLeftA() );
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetRightB( LNK->GetLeftB() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
//set the bottom side of the above link
|
||||
if (record_above_me->Direction()== GO_LEFT)
|
||||
if ( record_above_me->Direction() == GO_LEFT )
|
||||
{
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetLeftA(LNK->GetRightA());
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetLeftB(LNK->GetRightB());
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetLeftA( LNK->GetRightA() );
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetLeftB( LNK->GetRightB() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetRightA(LNK->GetRightA());
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetRightB(LNK->GetRightB());
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetRightA( LNK->GetRightA() );
|
||||
record_above_me->LNK->SetRightB( LNK->GetRightB() );
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
return par;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool Record::Equal(Record *a)
|
||||
bool Record::Equal( Record *a )
|
||||
{
|
||||
return((bool)( ( LNK->GetOther(a->LNK->GetBeginNode()) == a->LNK->GetEndNode()) &&
|
||||
( LNK->GetOther(a->LNK->GetEndNode()) == a->LNK->GetBeginNode()) ));
|
||||
return( ( bool )( ( LNK->GetOther( a->LNK->GetBeginNode() ) == a->LNK->GetEndNode() ) &&
|
||||
( LNK->GetOther( a->LNK->GetEndNode() ) == a->LNK->GetBeginNode() ) ) );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
KBoolLine* Record::GetLine()
|
||||
{
|
||||
return &_line;
|
||||
return & _line;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
|
|
@ -1,41 +1,37 @@
|
|||
/*! \file ../src/scanbeam.cpp
|
||||
\author Probably Klaas Holwerda or Julian Smart
|
||||
/*! \file src/scanbeam.cpp
|
||||
\author Klaas Holwerda or Julian Smart
|
||||
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Probably Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
Copyright: 2001-2004 (C) Klaas Holwerda
|
||||
|
||||
Licence: wxWidgets Licence
|
||||
Licence: see kboollicense.txt
|
||||
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: scanbeam.cpp,v 1.10 2005/06/17 23:05:18 kbluck Exp $
|
||||
RCS-ID: $Id: scanbeam.cpp,v 1.3 2008/06/04 21:23:22 titato Exp $
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
#ifdef __GNUG__
|
||||
#pragma implementation
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
||||
// class scanbeam
|
||||
// this class represents de space between two scanlines
|
||||
#include "../include/scanbeam.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/scanbeam.h"
|
||||
#include <math.h>
|
||||
#include <assert.h>
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/booleng.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/booleng.h"
|
||||
|
||||
#include "../include/graph.h"
|
||||
#include "../include/node.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/graph.h"
|
||||
#include "kbool/node.h"
|
||||
|
||||
//this here is to initialize the static iterator of scanbeam
|
||||
//with NOLIST constructor
|
||||
|
||||
int recordsorter(Record* , Record* );
|
||||
int recordsorter( Record* , Record* );
|
||||
|
||||
int recordsorter_ysp_angle(Record* , Record* );
|
||||
int recordsorter_ysp_angle_back(Record* rec1, Record* rec2);
|
||||
int recordsorter_ysp_angle( Record* , Record* );
|
||||
int recordsorter_ysp_angle_back( Record* rec1, Record* rec2 );
|
||||
|
||||
ScanBeam::ScanBeam(Bool_Engine* GC):DL_List<Record*>()
|
||||
ScanBeam::ScanBeam( Bool_Engine* GC ): DL_List<Record*>()
|
||||
{
|
||||
_GC = GC;
|
||||
_type=NORMAL;
|
||||
_BI.Attach(this);
|
||||
_type = NORMAL;
|
||||
_BI.Attach( this );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
ScanBeam::~ScanBeam()
|
||||
|
@ -47,12 +43,12 @@ ScanBeam::~ScanBeam()
|
|||
//DeleteRecordPool();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
void ScanBeam::SetType(Node* low,Node* high)
|
||||
void ScanBeam::SetType( Node* low, Node* high )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (low->GetX() < high->GetX())
|
||||
_type=NORMAL;
|
||||
if ( low->GetX() < high->GetX() )
|
||||
_type = NORMAL;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_type=FLAT;
|
||||
_type = FLAT;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
/*
|
||||
|
@ -268,7 +264,7 @@ bool ScanBeam::Update(TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I,Node* _lowf)
|
|||
}
|
||||
*/
|
||||
|
||||
bool ScanBeam::FindNew(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
||||
bool ScanBeam::FindNew( SCANTYPE scantype, TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
||||
{
|
||||
bool foundnew = false;
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -279,33 +275,33 @@ bool ScanBeam::FindNew(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
|||
//if (!checksort())
|
||||
// SortTheBeam();
|
||||
|
||||
lastinserted=0;
|
||||
lastinserted = 0;
|
||||
//ONLY links towards the low node are possible to be added
|
||||
//the bin flag will be set if it fits in the beam
|
||||
//so for following beams it will not be checked again
|
||||
while ( (link = _low->GetBinHighest(false)) != NULL )
|
||||
while ( ( link = _low->GetBinHighest( false ) ) != NULL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( (link->GetEndNode()->GetX() == link->GetBeginNode()->GetX()) //flatlink in flatbeam
|
||||
&& ((scantype == NODELINK) || (scantype == LINKLINK) || (scantype == LINKHOLES))
|
||||
if ( ( link->GetEndNode()->GetX() == link->GetBeginNode()->GetX() ) //flatlink in flatbeam
|
||||
&& ( ( scantype == NODELINK ) || ( scantype == LINKLINK ) || ( scantype == LINKHOLES ) )
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
switch(scantype)
|
||||
switch( scantype )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case NODELINK:
|
||||
{
|
||||
//all vertical links in flatbeam are ignored
|
||||
//normal link in beam
|
||||
Record* record=new Record(link,_GC);
|
||||
Record * record = new Record( link, _GC );
|
||||
// yp_new will always be the y of low node since all new links are
|
||||
// from this node
|
||||
record->SetYsp(_low->GetY());
|
||||
record->SetYsp( _low->GetY() );
|
||||
record->Set_Flags();
|
||||
// put new item left of the one that is lower in the beam
|
||||
// The last one inserted in this loop, is already left of the current
|
||||
// iterator position. So the new links are inerted in proper order.
|
||||
link->SetRecordNode( _BI.insbefore(record) );
|
||||
link->SetRecordNode( _BI.insbefore( record ) );
|
||||
_BI--;
|
||||
foundnew = Process_PointToLink_Crossings() !=0 || foundnew;
|
||||
foundnew = Process_PointToLink_Crossings() != 0 || foundnew;
|
||||
delete record;
|
||||
_BI.remove();
|
||||
break;
|
||||
|
@ -313,13 +309,13 @@ bool ScanBeam::FindNew(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
|||
case LINKLINK:
|
||||
//is the new record a flat link
|
||||
{
|
||||
KBoolLine flatline = KBoolLine(link, _GC);
|
||||
foundnew = Process_LinkToLink_Flat(&flatline) || foundnew;
|
||||
KBoolLine flatline = KBoolLine( link, _GC );
|
||||
foundnew = Process_LinkToLink_Flat( &flatline ) || foundnew;
|
||||
//flatlinks are not part of the beams, still they are used to find new beams
|
||||
//they can be processed now if the beginnode does not change, since this is used to
|
||||
//to find new beams. and its position does not change
|
||||
//ProcessCrossings does take care of this
|
||||
flatline.ProcessCrossings(_I);
|
||||
flatline.ProcessCrossings( _I );
|
||||
break;
|
||||
}
|
||||
case LINKHOLES : //holes are never to flatlinks
|
||||
|
@ -331,32 +327,32 @@ bool ScanBeam::FindNew(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
|||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
//normal link in beam
|
||||
Record* record = new Record(link,_GC);
|
||||
Record* record = new Record( link, _GC );
|
||||
// yp_new will always be the y of low node since all new links are
|
||||
// from this node
|
||||
record->SetYsp(_low->GetY());
|
||||
record->SetYsp( _low->GetY() );
|
||||
record->Set_Flags();
|
||||
// put new item left of the one that is lower in the beam
|
||||
// The last one inserted in this loop, is already left of the current
|
||||
// iterator position. So the new links are inserted in proper order.
|
||||
link->SetRecordNode( _BI.insbefore(record) );
|
||||
link->SetRecordNode( _BI.insbefore( record ) );
|
||||
lastinserted++;
|
||||
|
||||
//_GC->Write_Log( "after insert" );
|
||||
writebeam();
|
||||
|
||||
switch(scantype)
|
||||
switch( scantype )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case NODELINK:
|
||||
_BI--;
|
||||
foundnew = Process_PointToLink_Crossings() !=0 || foundnew;
|
||||
foundnew = Process_PointToLink_Crossings() != 0 || foundnew;
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
break;
|
||||
case INOUT:
|
||||
{
|
||||
_BI--;
|
||||
//now we can set the _inc flag
|
||||
Generate_INOUT(record->GetLink()->GetGraphNum());
|
||||
Generate_INOUT( record->GetLink()->GetGraphNum() );
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
break;
|
||||
|
@ -365,14 +361,14 @@ bool ScanBeam::FindNew(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
|||
//now we can set the a/b group flags based on the above link
|
||||
_BI--;
|
||||
_BI--;
|
||||
Record* above=0;
|
||||
if (!_BI.hitroot())
|
||||
above=_BI.item();
|
||||
Record* above = 0;
|
||||
if ( !_BI.hitroot() )
|
||||
above = _BI.item();
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
|
||||
//something to do for winding rule
|
||||
|
||||
if (record->Calc_Left_Right(above))
|
||||
if ( record->Calc_Left_Right( above ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
delete record;
|
||||
_BI.remove();
|
||||
|
@ -384,7 +380,7 @@ bool ScanBeam::FindNew(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
|||
break;
|
||||
case LINKHOLES:
|
||||
_BI--;
|
||||
holes = ProcessHoles(true,_I) || holes;
|
||||
holes = ProcessHoles( true, _I ) || holes;
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
break;
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -400,131 +396,131 @@ bool ScanBeam::FindNew(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
|||
return foundnew;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
bool ScanBeam::RemoveOld(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
||||
bool ScanBeam::RemoveOld( SCANTYPE scantype, TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
||||
{
|
||||
bool found = false;
|
||||
bool foundnew = false;
|
||||
DL_Iter<Record*> _BBI=DL_Iter<Record*>();
|
||||
bool attached=false;
|
||||
DL_Iter<Record*> _BBI = DL_Iter<Record*>();
|
||||
bool attached = false;
|
||||
|
||||
_low = _I->item()->GetBeginNode();
|
||||
|
||||
switch(scantype)
|
||||
switch( scantype )
|
||||
{
|
||||
case INOUT:
|
||||
case GENLR:
|
||||
case LINKHOLES:
|
||||
if (_type==NORMAL )
|
||||
if ( _type == NORMAL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (_low->GetBinHighest(true)) //is there something to remove
|
||||
if ( _low->GetBinHighest( true ) ) //is there something to remove
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( scantype == LINKHOLES )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_BI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_BI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_BI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Record* record=_BI.item();
|
||||
Record * record = _BI.item();
|
||||
//records containing links towards the new low node
|
||||
//are links to be removed
|
||||
if ((record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() == _low) ||
|
||||
(record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode() == _low)
|
||||
if ( ( record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() == _low ) ||
|
||||
( record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode() == _low )
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
holes = ProcessHoles(false,_I) || holes;
|
||||
holes = ProcessHoles( false, _I ) || holes;
|
||||
}
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
_BI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_BI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_BI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Record* record=_BI.item();
|
||||
Record * record = _BI.item();
|
||||
//records containing links towards the new low node
|
||||
//are links to be removed
|
||||
if ((record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() == _low) ||
|
||||
(record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode() == _low)
|
||||
if ( ( record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() == _low ) ||
|
||||
( record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode() == _low )
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (attached) //there is a bug
|
||||
if ( attached ) //there is a bug
|
||||
{
|
||||
_BBI.Detach();
|
||||
if (!checksort())
|
||||
if ( !checksort() )
|
||||
SortTheBeam( true );
|
||||
_BI.tohead();
|
||||
attached=false;
|
||||
attached = false;
|
||||
|
||||
}
|
||||
delete _BI.item();
|
||||
_BI.remove();
|
||||
found=true;
|
||||
found = true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else if (found) //only once in here
|
||||
else if ( found ) //only once in here
|
||||
{
|
||||
attached=true;
|
||||
found=false;
|
||||
_BBI.Attach(this);
|
||||
_BBI.toiter(&_BI); //this is the position new records will be inserted
|
||||
attached = true;
|
||||
found = false;
|
||||
_BBI.Attach( this );
|
||||
_BBI.toiter( &_BI ); //this is the position new records will be inserted
|
||||
|
||||
//recalculate ysp for the new scanline
|
||||
record->Calc_Ysp(_low);
|
||||
record->Calc_Ysp( _low );
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
//recalculate ysp for the new scanline
|
||||
record->Calc_Ysp(_low);
|
||||
record->Calc_Ysp( _low );
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
if (attached)
|
||||
if ( attached )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_BI.toiter(&_BBI);
|
||||
_BI.toiter( &_BBI );
|
||||
_BBI.Detach();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
_BBI.Attach(this);
|
||||
_BBI.Attach( this );
|
||||
_BBI.toroot();
|
||||
_BI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_BI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_BI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Record* record=_BI.item();
|
||||
Record * record = _BI.item();
|
||||
|
||||
record->Calc_Ysp(_low);
|
||||
if (!found && (record->Ysp() < _low->GetY()))
|
||||
record->Calc_Ysp( _low );
|
||||
if ( !found && ( record->Ysp() < _low->GetY() ) )
|
||||
{
|
||||
found=true;
|
||||
_BBI.toiter(&_BI);
|
||||
found = true;
|
||||
_BBI.toiter( &_BI );
|
||||
}
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
_BI.toiter(&_BBI);
|
||||
_BI.toiter( &_BBI );
|
||||
_BBI.Detach();
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ //because the previous beam was flat the links to remove are
|
||||
//below the last insert position
|
||||
if (_low->GetBinHighest(true)) //is there something to remove
|
||||
if ( _low->GetBinHighest( true ) ) //is there something to remove
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
||||
if ( scantype == LINKHOLES )
|
||||
{
|
||||
_BI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_BI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_BI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Record* record=_BI.item();
|
||||
Record * record = _BI.item();
|
||||
//records containing links towards the new low node
|
||||
//are links to be removed
|
||||
if ((record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() == _low) ||
|
||||
(record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode() == _low)
|
||||
if ( ( record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() == _low ) ||
|
||||
( record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode() == _low )
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
holes = ProcessHoles(false,_I) || holes;
|
||||
holes = ProcessHoles( false, _I ) || holes;
|
||||
}
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -540,22 +536,22 @@ bool ScanBeam::RemoveOld(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
|||
//if (_BI.hitroot()) //only possible when at the begin of the beam
|
||||
|
||||
_BI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_BI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_BI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Record* record=_BI.item();
|
||||
Record * record = _BI.item();
|
||||
//records containing links towards the new low node
|
||||
//are links to be removed
|
||||
if ((record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() == _low) ||
|
||||
(record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode() == _low)
|
||||
if ( ( record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() == _low ) ||
|
||||
( record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode() == _low )
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
delete _BI.item();
|
||||
_BI.remove();
|
||||
found=true;
|
||||
found = true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else if (found) //only once in here
|
||||
else if ( found ) //only once in here
|
||||
break;
|
||||
else if (record->Ysp() < _low->GetY())
|
||||
else if ( record->Ysp() < _low->GetY() )
|
||||
//if flatlinks are not in the beam nothing will be found
|
||||
//this will bring us to the right insertion point
|
||||
break;
|
||||
|
@ -574,10 +570,10 @@ bool ScanBeam::RemoveOld(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
|||
//_BI--;
|
||||
//if (_BI.hitroot()) //only possible when at the begin of the beam
|
||||
_BI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_BI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_BI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Record* record=_BI.item();
|
||||
if (record->Ysp() < _low->GetY())
|
||||
Record * record = _BI.item();
|
||||
if ( record->Ysp() < _low->GetY() )
|
||||
break;
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -588,11 +584,11 @@ bool ScanBeam::RemoveOld(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
|||
case NODELINK:
|
||||
case LINKLINK:
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (_type == NORMAL)
|
||||
if ( _type == NORMAL )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Calc_Ysp();
|
||||
if (scantype==LINKLINK)
|
||||
foundnew = Process_LinkToLink_Crossings() !=0 || foundnew;
|
||||
if ( scantype == LINKLINK )
|
||||
foundnew = Process_LinkToLink_Crossings() != 0 || foundnew;
|
||||
else
|
||||
SortTheBeam( false );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -600,29 +596,29 @@ bool ScanBeam::RemoveOld(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
|||
//do not change the ysp of links already there, new non flat links
|
||||
//are inserted in order, as result the beam stays sorted
|
||||
|
||||
if (_low->GetBinHighest(true)) //is there something to remove
|
||||
if ( _low->GetBinHighest( true ) ) //is there something to remove
|
||||
{
|
||||
_BI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_BI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_BI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Record* record=_BI.item();
|
||||
Record * record = _BI.item();
|
||||
//records containing links towards the new low node
|
||||
//are links to be removed
|
||||
if ((record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() == _low) ||
|
||||
(record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode() == _low)
|
||||
if ( ( record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() == _low ) ||
|
||||
( record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode() == _low )
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
KBoolLine* line=record->GetLine();
|
||||
if (scantype==NODELINK)
|
||||
foundnew = Process_PointToLink_Crossings() !=0 || foundnew;
|
||||
line->ProcessCrossings(_I);
|
||||
KBoolLine * line = record->GetLine();
|
||||
if ( scantype == NODELINK )
|
||||
foundnew = Process_PointToLink_Crossings() != 0 || foundnew;
|
||||
line->ProcessCrossings( _I );
|
||||
delete _BI.item();
|
||||
_BI.remove();
|
||||
found=true;
|
||||
found = true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
//because the beam is sorted on ysp, stop when nothing can be there to remove
|
||||
//and the right insertion point for new links has been found
|
||||
else if ((record->Ysp() < _low->GetY()))
|
||||
else if ( ( record->Ysp() < _low->GetY() ) )
|
||||
break;
|
||||
else
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
|
@ -631,12 +627,12 @@ bool ScanBeam::RemoveOld(SCANTYPE scantype,TDLI<KBoolLink>* _I, bool& holes )
|
|||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
_BI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_BI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_BI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Record* record=_BI.item();
|
||||
Record * record = _BI.item();
|
||||
//because the beam is sorted on ysp, stop when
|
||||
//the right insertion point for new links has been found
|
||||
if ((record->Ysp() < _low->GetY()))
|
||||
if ( ( record->Ysp() < _low->GetY() ) )
|
||||
break;
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -927,11 +923,11 @@ void ScanBeam::SortTheBeam( bool backangle )
|
|||
void ScanBeam::Calc_Ysp()
|
||||
{
|
||||
_BI.tohead();
|
||||
while (!_BI.hitroot())
|
||||
while ( !_BI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Record* record=_BI.item();
|
||||
Record * record = _BI.item();
|
||||
// KBoolLink* link=_BI.item()->GetLink();
|
||||
record->Calc_Ysp(_low);
|
||||
record->Calc_Ysp( _low );
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -939,42 +935,42 @@ void ScanBeam::Calc_Ysp()
|
|||
// this function will set for all the records which contain a link with the
|
||||
// corresponding graphnumber the inc flag.
|
||||
// The inc flag's function is to see in a beam if we go deeper in the graph or not
|
||||
void ScanBeam::Generate_INOUT(int graphnumber)
|
||||
void ScanBeam::Generate_INOUT( int graphnumber )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DIRECTION first_dir = GO_LEFT;
|
||||
int diepte = 0;
|
||||
|
||||
DL_Iter<Record*> _BBI = DL_Iter<Record*>();
|
||||
_BBI.Attach(this);
|
||||
_BBI.Attach( this );
|
||||
for( _BBI.tohead(); !_BBI.hitroot(); _BBI++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// recalculate _inc again
|
||||
if ( _BBI.item()->GetLink()->GetGraphNum()==graphnumber)
|
||||
if ( _BBI.item()->GetLink()->GetGraphNum() == graphnumber )
|
||||
{ //found a link that belongs to the graph
|
||||
if (diepte==0)
|
||||
if ( diepte == 0 )
|
||||
{ // first link found or at depth zero again
|
||||
// the direction is important since this is used to find out
|
||||
// if we go further in or out for coming links
|
||||
first_dir=_BBI.item()->Direction();
|
||||
_BBI.item()->GetLink()->SetInc(true);
|
||||
diepte=1;
|
||||
first_dir = _BBI.item()->Direction();
|
||||
_BBI.item()->GetLink()->SetInc( true );
|
||||
diepte = 1;
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{ // according to depth=1 links set depth
|
||||
// verhoog of verlaag diepte
|
||||
if (_BBI.item()->Direction() == first_dir)
|
||||
if ( _BBI.item()->Direction() == first_dir )
|
||||
{
|
||||
diepte++;
|
||||
_BBI.item()->GetLink()->SetInc(true);
|
||||
_BBI.item()->GetLink()->SetInc( true );
|
||||
}
|
||||
else
|
||||
{
|
||||
diepte--;
|
||||
_BBI.item()->GetLink()->SetInc(false);
|
||||
_BBI.item()->GetLink()->SetInc( false );
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
if ( _BBI.item() == _BI.item()) break; //not need to do the rest, will come in a later beam
|
||||
if ( _BBI.item() == _BI.item() ) break; //not need to do the rest, will come in a later beam
|
||||
}
|
||||
_BBI.Detach();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -1006,13 +1002,13 @@ void ScanBeam::Generate_INOUT(int graphnumber)
|
|||
bool ScanBeam::ProcessHoles( bool atinsert, TDLI<KBoolLink>* _LI )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// The scanbeam must already be sorted at this moment
|
||||
Node *topnode;
|
||||
Node * topnode;
|
||||
bool foundholes = false;
|
||||
|
||||
Record* record = _BI.item();
|
||||
KBoolLink* link = record->GetLink();
|
||||
|
||||
if (!record->GetLine()->CrossListEmpty())
|
||||
if ( !record->GetLine()->CrossListEmpty() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
SortTheBeam( atinsert );
|
||||
|
||||
|
@ -1022,17 +1018,17 @@ bool ScanBeam::ProcessHoles( bool atinsert, TDLI<KBoolLink>* _LI )
|
|||
// make new nodes and links and set them, re-use the old link, so the links
|
||||
// that still stand in the linecrosslist will not be lost.
|
||||
// There is a hole that must be linked to this link !
|
||||
TDLI<Node> I(record->GetLine()->GetCrossList());
|
||||
TDLI<Node> I( record->GetLine()->GetCrossList() );
|
||||
I.tohead();
|
||||
while(!I.hitroot())
|
||||
while( !I.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
topnode = I.item();
|
||||
I.remove();
|
||||
|
||||
KBoolLine line(_GC);
|
||||
line.Set(link);
|
||||
KBoolLine line( _GC );
|
||||
line.Set( link );
|
||||
|
||||
B_INT Y = line.Calculate_Y(topnode->GetX());
|
||||
B_INT Y = line.Calculate_Y( topnode->GetX() );
|
||||
|
||||
// Now we'll create new nodes and new links to make the link between
|
||||
// the graphs.
|
||||
|
@ -1058,32 +1054,32 @@ bool ScanBeam::ProcessHoles( bool atinsert, TDLI<KBoolLink>* _LI )
|
|||
|
||||
|
||||
Node * leftnode; //left node of clossest link
|
||||
(link->GetBeginNode()->GetX() < link->GetEndNode()->GetX()) ?
|
||||
leftnode = link->GetBeginNode():
|
||||
( link->GetBeginNode()->GetX() < link->GetEndNode()->GetX() ) ?
|
||||
leftnode = link->GetBeginNode() :
|
||||
leftnode = link->GetEndNode();
|
||||
|
||||
Node *node_A = new Node(topnode->GetX(),Y, _GC);
|
||||
KBoolLink *link_A = new KBoolLink(0, leftnode, node_A, _GC);
|
||||
KBoolLink *link_B = new KBoolLink(0, node_A, topnode, _GC);
|
||||
KBoolLink *link_BB = new KBoolLink(0, topnode, node_A, _GC);
|
||||
Node *node_A = new Node( topnode->GetX(), Y, _GC );
|
||||
KBoolLink *link_A = new KBoolLink( 0, leftnode, node_A, _GC );
|
||||
KBoolLink *link_B = new KBoolLink( 0, node_A, topnode, _GC );
|
||||
KBoolLink *link_BB = new KBoolLink( 0, topnode, node_A, _GC );
|
||||
KBoolLink *link_D = _BI.item()->GetLink();
|
||||
link_D->Replace(leftnode,node_A);
|
||||
_LI->insbegin(link_A);
|
||||
_LI->insbegin(link_B);
|
||||
_LI->insbegin(link_BB);
|
||||
link_D->Replace( leftnode, node_A );
|
||||
_LI->insbegin( link_A );
|
||||
_LI->insbegin( link_B );
|
||||
_LI->insbegin( link_BB );
|
||||
|
||||
//mark those two segments as hole linking segments
|
||||
link_B->SetHoleLink(true);
|
||||
link_BB->SetHoleLink(true);
|
||||
link_B->SetHoleLink( true );
|
||||
link_BB->SetHoleLink( true );
|
||||
|
||||
//is where we come from/link to a hole
|
||||
bool closest_is_hole = link->GetHole();
|
||||
|
||||
// if the polygon linked to, is a hole, this hole here
|
||||
// just gets bigger, so we take over the links its hole marking.
|
||||
link_A->SetHole(closest_is_hole);
|
||||
link_B->SetHole(closest_is_hole);
|
||||
link_BB->SetHole(closest_is_hole);
|
||||
link_A->SetHole( closest_is_hole );
|
||||
link_B->SetHole( closest_is_hole );
|
||||
link_BB->SetHole( closest_is_hole );
|
||||
|
||||
// we have only one operation at the time, taking
|
||||
// over the operation flags is enough, since the linking segments will
|
||||
|
@ -1094,13 +1090,13 @@ bool ScanBeam::ProcessHoles( bool atinsert, TDLI<KBoolLink>* _LI )
|
|||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
if (link->IsTopHole() )
|
||||
if ( link->IsTopHole() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
SortTheBeam( atinsert );
|
||||
writebeam();
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
if (link->IsTopHole() && !_BI.athead() )
|
||||
if ( link->IsTopHole() && !_BI.athead() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
// now we check if this hole should now be linked, or later
|
||||
// we always link on the node with the maximum y value, Why ? because i like it !
|
||||
|
@ -1108,7 +1104,7 @@ bool ScanBeam::ProcessHoles( bool atinsert, TDLI<KBoolLink>* _LI )
|
|||
|
||||
assert( record->Direction() == GO_LEFT );
|
||||
// he goes to the left
|
||||
if (atinsert)
|
||||
if ( atinsert )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if ( link->GetBeginNode()->GetY() <= link->GetEndNode()->GetY() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
|
@ -1116,10 +1112,10 @@ bool ScanBeam::ProcessHoles( bool atinsert, TDLI<KBoolLink>* _LI )
|
|||
//the previous link in the scanbeam == the closest link to the hole in vertical
|
||||
//direction PUT this node into this link
|
||||
_BI--;
|
||||
_BI.item()->GetLine()->AddCrossing(topnode);
|
||||
_BI.item()->GetLine()->AddCrossing( topnode );
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
//reset tophole flag, hole has been processed
|
||||
link->SetTopHole(false);
|
||||
link->SetTopHole( false );
|
||||
foundholes = true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -1130,10 +1126,10 @@ bool ScanBeam::ProcessHoles( bool atinsert, TDLI<KBoolLink>* _LI )
|
|||
//the previous link in the scanbeam == the closest link to the hole in vertical
|
||||
//direction PUT this node into this link
|
||||
_BI--;
|
||||
_BI.item()->GetLine()->AddCrossing(topnode);
|
||||
_BI.item()->GetLine()->AddCrossing( topnode );
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
//reset mark to flag that this hole has been processed
|
||||
link->SetTopHole(false);
|
||||
link->SetTopHole( false );
|
||||
foundholes = true;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -1141,38 +1137,38 @@ bool ScanBeam::ProcessHoles( bool atinsert, TDLI<KBoolLink>* _LI )
|
|||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//sort the records on Ysp if eqaul, sort on tangent at ysp
|
||||
int recordsorter_ysp_angle(Record* rec1, Record* rec2)
|
||||
int recordsorter_ysp_angle( Record* rec1, Record* rec2 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (rec1->Ysp() > rec2->Ysp() )
|
||||
return(1);
|
||||
if (rec1->Ysp() < rec2->Ysp() )
|
||||
return(-1);
|
||||
if ( rec1->Ysp() > rec2->Ysp() )
|
||||
return( 1 );
|
||||
if ( rec1->Ysp() < rec2->Ysp() )
|
||||
return( -1 );
|
||||
//it seems they are equal
|
||||
B_INT rightY1;
|
||||
if (rec1->Direction()==GO_LEFT)
|
||||
if ( rec1->Direction() == GO_LEFT )
|
||||
rightY1 = rec1->GetLink()->GetBeginNode()->GetY();
|
||||
else
|
||||
rightY1 = rec1->GetLink()->GetEndNode()->GetY();
|
||||
B_INT rightY2;
|
||||
if (rec2->Direction()==GO_LEFT)
|
||||
if ( rec2->Direction() == GO_LEFT )
|
||||
rightY2 = rec2->GetLink()->GetBeginNode()->GetY();
|
||||
else
|
||||
rightY2 = rec2->GetLink()->GetEndNode()->GetY();
|
||||
|
||||
if ( rightY1 > rightY2 )
|
||||
return(1);
|
||||
return( 1 );
|
||||
if ( rightY1 < rightY2 )
|
||||
return(-1);
|
||||
return(0);
|
||||
return( -1 );
|
||||
return( 0 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//sort the records on Ysp if eqaul, sort on tangent at ysp
|
||||
int recordsorter_ysp_angle_back(Record* rec1, Record* rec2)
|
||||
int recordsorter_ysp_angle_back( Record* rec1, Record* rec2 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (rec1->Ysp() > rec2->Ysp() )
|
||||
return(1);
|
||||
if (rec1->Ysp() < rec2->Ysp() )
|
||||
return(-1);
|
||||
if ( rec1->Ysp() > rec2->Ysp() )
|
||||
return( 1 );
|
||||
if ( rec1->Ysp() < rec2->Ysp() )
|
||||
return( -1 );
|
||||
//it seems they are equal
|
||||
B_INT leftY1;
|
||||
if ( rec1->Direction() == GO_RIGHT )
|
||||
|
@ -1186,16 +1182,16 @@ int recordsorter_ysp_angle_back(Record* rec1, Record* rec2)
|
|||
leftY2 = rec2->GetLink()->GetEndNode()->GetY();
|
||||
|
||||
if ( leftY1 > leftY2 )
|
||||
return(1);
|
||||
return( 1 );
|
||||
if ( leftY1 < leftY2 )
|
||||
return(-1);
|
||||
return(0);
|
||||
return( -1 );
|
||||
return( 0 );
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
// swap functie for cocktailsort ==> each swap means an intersection of links
|
||||
bool swap_crossing_normal(Record *a, Record *b)
|
||||
bool swap_crossing_normal( Record *a, Record *b )
|
||||
{
|
||||
if (!a->Equal(b)) // records NOT parallel
|
||||
if ( !a->Equal( b ) ) // records NOT parallel
|
||||
{
|
||||
a->GetLine()->Intersect_simple( b->GetLine() );
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
|
@ -1216,47 +1212,47 @@ int ScanBeam::Process_PointToLink_Crossings()
|
|||
int merges = 0;
|
||||
Record* record;
|
||||
|
||||
if (_BI.count() > 1)
|
||||
if ( _BI.count() > 1 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
DL_Iter<Record*> IL = DL_Iter<Record*>(this);
|
||||
IL.toiter(&_BI);
|
||||
DL_Iter<Record*> IL = DL_Iter<Record*>( this );
|
||||
IL.toiter( &_BI );
|
||||
|
||||
//from IL search back for close links
|
||||
IL--;
|
||||
while(!IL.hitroot())
|
||||
while( !IL.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
record=IL.item();
|
||||
record = IL.item();
|
||||
|
||||
if (record->Ysp() > _low->GetY()+ _GC->GetInternalMarge())
|
||||
if ( record->Ysp() > _low->GetY() + _GC->GetInternalMarge() )
|
||||
break;
|
||||
|
||||
// the distance to the lo/hi node is smaller then the _GC->GetInternalMarge()
|
||||
if( (record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode()!= _low) &&
|
||||
(record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() != _low)
|
||||
if( ( record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode() != _low ) &&
|
||||
( record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() != _low )
|
||||
)
|
||||
{ // the link is not towards the lohi node
|
||||
record->GetLine()->AddCrossing(_low);
|
||||
record->GetLine()->AddCrossing( _low );
|
||||
merges++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
IL--;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
//from IL search forward for close links
|
||||
IL.toiter(&_BI);
|
||||
IL.toiter( &_BI );
|
||||
IL++;
|
||||
while(!IL.hitroot())
|
||||
while( !IL.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
record=IL.item();
|
||||
record = IL.item();
|
||||
|
||||
if (record->Ysp() < _low->GetY()- _GC->GetInternalMarge())
|
||||
if ( record->Ysp() < _low->GetY() - _GC->GetInternalMarge() )
|
||||
break;
|
||||
|
||||
// the distance to the lohi node is smaller then the booleng->Get_Marge()
|
||||
if( (record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode()!=_low) &&
|
||||
(record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() !=_low)
|
||||
if( ( record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode() != _low ) &&
|
||||
( record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() != _low )
|
||||
)
|
||||
{ // the link is not towards the low node
|
||||
record->GetLine()->AddCrossing(_low);
|
||||
record->GetLine()->AddCrossing( _low );
|
||||
merges++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
IL++;
|
||||
|
@ -1267,44 +1263,44 @@ int ScanBeam::Process_PointToLink_Crossings()
|
|||
return merges;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
int ScanBeam::Process_LinkToLink_Flat(KBoolLine* flatline)
|
||||
int ScanBeam::Process_LinkToLink_Flat( KBoolLine* flatline )
|
||||
{
|
||||
int crossfound = 0;
|
||||
Record* record;
|
||||
DL_Iter<Record*> _BBI = DL_Iter<Record*>();
|
||||
_BBI.Attach(this);
|
||||
_BBI.toiter(&_BI);
|
||||
_BBI.Attach( this );
|
||||
_BBI.toiter( &_BI );
|
||||
|
||||
for(_BI.tohead(); !_BI.hitroot(); _BI++)
|
||||
for( _BI.tohead(); !_BI.hitroot(); _BI++ )
|
||||
{
|
||||
record=_BI.item();
|
||||
record = _BI.item();
|
||||
|
||||
if (record->Ysp() < (flatline->GetLink()->GetLowNode()->GetY() - _GC->GetInternalMarge()))
|
||||
if ( record->Ysp() < ( flatline->GetLink()->GetLowNode()->GetY() - _GC->GetInternalMarge() ) )
|
||||
break;//they are sorted so no other can be there
|
||||
|
||||
if ((record->Ysp() > (flatline->GetLink()->GetLowNode()->GetY() - _GC->GetInternalMarge()))
|
||||
if ( ( record->Ysp() > ( flatline->GetLink()->GetLowNode()->GetY() - _GC->GetInternalMarge() ) )
|
||||
&&
|
||||
(record->Ysp() < (flatline->GetLink()->GetHighNode()->GetY() + _GC->GetInternalMarge()))
|
||||
( record->Ysp() < ( flatline->GetLink()->GetHighNode()->GetY() + _GC->GetInternalMarge() ) )
|
||||
)
|
||||
{ //it is in between the flat link region
|
||||
//create a new node at ysp and insert it in both the flatlink and the crossing link
|
||||
|
||||
if (
|
||||
(record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() != flatline->GetLink()->GetHighNode()) &&
|
||||
(record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() != flatline->GetLink()->GetLowNode() ) &&
|
||||
(record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode()!= flatline->GetLink()->GetHighNode()) &&
|
||||
(record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode()!= flatline->GetLink()->GetLowNode() )
|
||||
( record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() != flatline->GetLink()->GetHighNode() ) &&
|
||||
( record->GetLink()->GetEndNode() != flatline->GetLink()->GetLowNode() ) &&
|
||||
( record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode() != flatline->GetLink()->GetHighNode() ) &&
|
||||
( record->GetLink()->GetBeginNode() != flatline->GetLink()->GetLowNode() )
|
||||
)
|
||||
{
|
||||
Node *newnode = new Node(_low->GetX(),_BI.item()->Ysp(), _GC);
|
||||
flatline->AddCrossing(newnode);
|
||||
record->GetLine()->AddCrossing(newnode);
|
||||
Node * newnode = new Node( _low->GetX(), _BI.item()->Ysp(), _GC );
|
||||
flatline->AddCrossing( newnode );
|
||||
record->GetLine()->AddCrossing( newnode );
|
||||
crossfound++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
||||
_BI.toiter(&_BBI);
|
||||
_BI.toiter( &_BBI );
|
||||
_BBI.Detach();
|
||||
return crossfound;
|
||||
}
|
||||
|
@ -1312,22 +1308,22 @@ int ScanBeam::Process_LinkToLink_Flat(KBoolLine* flatline)
|
|||
bool ScanBeam::checksort()
|
||||
{
|
||||
// if empty then just insert
|
||||
if (empty())
|
||||
if ( empty() )
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
|
||||
// put new item left of the one that is bigger
|
||||
_BI.tohead();
|
||||
Record* prev=_BI.item();
|
||||
Record* prev = _BI.item();
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
while(!_BI.hitroot())
|
||||
while( !_BI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Record* curr=_BI.item();
|
||||
if (recordsorter_ysp_angle(prev,curr)==-1)
|
||||
Record * curr = _BI.item();
|
||||
if ( recordsorter_ysp_angle( prev, curr ) == -1 )
|
||||
{
|
||||
recordsorter_ysp_angle(prev,curr);
|
||||
recordsorter_ysp_angle( prev, curr );
|
||||
return false;
|
||||
}
|
||||
prev=_BI.item();
|
||||
prev = _BI.item();
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
|
@ -1336,16 +1332,16 @@ bool ScanBeam::checksort()
|
|||
bool ScanBeam::writebeam()
|
||||
{
|
||||
#if KBOOL_DEBUG == 1
|
||||
FILE* file = _GC->GetLogFile();
|
||||
FILE * file = _GC->GetLogFile();
|
||||
|
||||
if (file == NULL)
|
||||
if ( file == NULL )
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf( file, "# beam %d \n", count() );
|
||||
fprintf( file, " low %I64d %I64d \n", _low->GetX() , _low->GetY() );
|
||||
fprintf( file, " type %d \n", _type );
|
||||
|
||||
if (empty())
|
||||
if ( empty() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
fprintf( file, " empty \n" );
|
||||
return true;
|
||||
|
@ -1355,17 +1351,20 @@ bool ScanBeam::writebeam()
|
|||
|
||||
// put new item left of the one that is bigger
|
||||
_BI.tohead();
|
||||
while(!_BI.hitroot())
|
||||
while( !_BI.hitroot() )
|
||||
{
|
||||
Record* cur=_BI.item();
|
||||
Record * cur = _BI.item();
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf( file, " ysp %I64d \n", cur->Ysp() );
|
||||
|
||||
KBoolLink* curl=cur->GetLink();
|
||||
KBoolLink* curl = cur->GetLink();
|
||||
|
||||
fprintf( file, " linkbegin %I64d %I64d \n", curl->GetBeginNode()->GetX(), curl->GetBeginNode()->GetY() );
|
||||
fprintf( file, " linkend %I64d %I64d \n", curl->GetEndNode()->GetX(), curl->GetEndNode()->GetY() );
|
||||
|
||||
if ( curl->GetEndNode()->GetX() == -2459565876494606883 )
|
||||
fprintf( file, " linkend %I64d %I64d \n", curl->GetEndNode()->GetX(), curl->GetEndNode()->GetY() );
|
||||
|
||||
_BI++;
|
||||
}
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
|
|
Loading…
Reference in New Issue